JP2023111104A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To reduce the possibility of a disadvantage being generated to a player.SOLUTION: In the case where, in an advantageous state, a preset first irregular condition is established and a second irregular condition different from the first irregular condition is established, the state is shifted from the advantageous state to another state. Both in the case where, in the advantageous state, the first irregular condition is established, and in the case where, in the advantageous state, the second irregular condition is established, a preset state change suggesting performance is executed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 112

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine in which a big win lottery is performed based on the entry of a game ball into a start hole, and when a big win is won by this big win lottery, a big win game is executed in which the big win hole is opened. . In such a gaming machine, a plurality of game states with different game progress conditions are provided, and it is common to vary the shooting direction of the game ball and the area into which the game ball should enter depending on the game state.

For example, Patent Literature 1 discloses a gaming machine in which start ports of different types are provided, and the type of hold that is subject to substantial variation differs depending on the game state.

JP 2019-170744 A

In order to improve the interest of the game, there is a demand for the development of new game features that accompany the transition of the game state. There is a risk of

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the possibility of a player being disadvantaged.

In order to solve the above-described problems, the gaming machine of the present invention is a gaming machine in which a game progresses in one of a plurality of states including a predetermined state in which the game progresses when a starting condition is established, Game control means for controlling the progress of the game based on the state, and when a preset first irregular condition is established in the predetermined state, and a second irregular condition different from the first irregular condition state changing means for shifting from the predetermined state to another state when a regular condition is satisfied; and a performance executing means for executing a preset common performance in both cases when a regular condition is established.

According to the present invention, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will be disadvantaged.

It is a perspective view of the gaming machine showing a state in which the door according to the type 1 and 2 reference example is opened. 1 is a front view of a game machine according to a 1-2 type reference example; FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the 2nd big prize-winning hole based on a 1st-2nd kind reference example. 1 is a block diagram of a gaming machine according to a 1-2 type reference example; FIG. It is an address map of the memory area used by the main CPU according to the one-kind-two reference example. It is a diagram for explaining a special 1 jackpot determination random number determination table according to the 1 type 2 type reference example. It is a figure explaining the jackpot decision random number determination table for special 2 based on a 1 type 2 type reference example. It is a diagram for explaining a winning symbol random number determination table according to the one-two reference example. It is a figure explaining the reach group determination random number determination table based on a 1 type 2 type reference example. It is a figure explaining the reach mode determination random number determination table based on a 1 type 2 type reference example. It is a figure explaining the variation pattern random number determination table based on a 1 type 2 type reference example. It is a figure explaining the fluctuation|variation time determination table based on a 1 type 2 type reference example. It is a diagram for explaining a first special electric accessary product operating ram set table according to the first and second reference examples. It is a diagram for explaining a second special electric accessary product operating ram set table according to the first and second reference examples. It is a figure explaining the opening-and-closing mode of the 2nd big prize-winning mouth based on the 1st-2nd kind reference example, and the opening-and-closing mode of the specific area by a movable member. It is a diagram for explaining a game state setting table for setting the game state after the end of the big win game according to the first and second reference example. It is a figure explaining the hit determination random number determination table based on a 1 type 2 type reference example. (a) is a diagram for explaining a normal symbol variation time data table according to a one-two type reference example, and (b) is a diagram for explaining an opening/closing control pattern table according to a one-two type reference example. It is a figure explaining the gaming machine state flag which concerns on a 1 type 2 type reference example. It is the 1st flowchart explaining the CPU initialization process in the main-control board|substrate based on a 1st-2nd kind reference example. FIG. 10 is a second flowchart for explaining CPU initialization processing in the main control board according to the one-kind-two reference example; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart for explaining subcommand group set processing in the main control board according to the one-kind-two reference example; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart for explaining save processing at power-off in the main control board according to the first and second reference examples; FIG. It is a flowchart explaining the timer interrupt processing in the main control board which concerns on a 1 type 2 type reference example. It is a flow chart explaining the setting related processing in the main control board concerning the one kind two reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the switch management process in the main control board which concerns on a 1 type 2 reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the gate passage process in the main-control board|substrate based on a 1 type 2 reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the 1st starting opening passage process in the main control board which concerns on a 1st 2nd reference example. It is a flowchart explaining the 2nd starting opening passage process in the main control board which concerns on a 1st 2nd reference example. It is a flow chart for explaining a special symbol random number acquisition process in the main control board according to the one-two reference example. It is a flow chart for explaining effect determination processing at the time of acquisition in the main control board according to the first and second reference examples. FIG. 11 is a flow chart for explaining specific area passage processing in the main control board according to the first and second reference examples; FIG. It is a diagram illustrating a special game management phase according to the one-two reference example. It is a flow chart for explaining a special game management process in the main control board according to the one-two reference example. It is a flow chart for explaining a special symbol variation waiting process in the main control board according to the one-two reference example. It is a flowchart for explaining a special symbol hit determination process in the main control board according to the one-two reference example. It is a flow chart for explaining a special symbol variation number determination process in the main control board according to the one-two reference example. It is a flow chart for explaining a process during special symbol variation in the main control board according to the first and second reference examples. It is a flow chart for explaining a special symbol stop symbol display process in the main control board according to the one-two reference example. It is a flow chart for explaining the big winning opening pre-opening processing in the main control board according to the first and second reference example. It is a flow chart for explaining the big winning opening open/close switching process in the main control board according to the one-kind-two reference example. It is a flow chart for explaining the big winning opening opening control process in the main control board according to the one-two reference example. It is a flow chart for explaining a large winning opening closing effective process in the main control board according to the first and second reference example. It is a flow chart for explaining a big winning opening end wait process in the main control board according to the one-two reference example. It is a diagram for explaining a normal game management phase according to the one-two reference example. It is a flow chart for explaining normal game management processing in the main control board according to the first and second reference examples. It is a flow chart for explaining the normal symbol variation waiting process in the main control board according to the one-two reference example. It is a flow chart for explaining the process during normal symbol fluctuation in the main control board according to the one-two reference example. It is a flow chart for explaining normal symbol stop symbol display processing in the main control board according to the one-two reference example. It is a flow chart for explaining a normal electric accessary prize winning opening pre-opening process in the main control board according to the first and second reference example. It is a flow chart for explaining normal electric accessary prize winning opening opening and closing switching processing in the main control board according to the first and second reference example. It is a flow chart for explaining normal electric accessary prize winning opening control processing in the main control board according to the first and second reference example. It is a flow chart for explaining normal electric accessary prize winning opening closing effective processing in the main control board according to the first and second reference example. It is a flow chart for explaining normal electric accessary prize winning opening end wait processing in the main control board according to the first and second reference example. It is a figure explaining an example of the variation production|presentation of the no reach variation pattern based on the production|presentation reference example. It is a figure explaining an example of the fluctuation production|presentation of the normal reach fluctuation pattern based on the production|presentation reference example. It is a figure explaining an example of the variation production|presentation of the developed reach variation pattern at the time of loss based on the production|presentation reference example. It is a figure explaining an example of the variation production|presentation of the development reach variation pattern at the time of a big hit based on the production|presentation reference example. It is a figure explaining an example of a variable production|presentation in case the ready-to-reach development production|presentation based on a production|presentation reference example is performed twice. It is a figure explaining an example of the fluctuation|variation production|presentation of the pseudo continuous ready-to-reach fluctuation pattern based on the production|presentation reference example. It is a figure explaining the variable production|presentation determination table based on the production|presentation reference example. It is a figure explaining an example of the pending|holding display production|presentation based on the production|presentation reference example. (a) is a diagram for explaining a final pending display pattern determination table according to a reference example of production, and (b) is a diagram for explaining a immediately previous pending display pattern determination table according to a reference example of production. It is a flowchart explaining the sub CPU initialization process in the sub control board which concerns on the production|presentation reference example. It is a flow chart explaining the sub-timer interrupt processing in the sub-control board according to the effect reference example. It is a flow chart explaining the look-ahead designation command reception processing in the sub-control board according to the effect reference example. It is a flow chart explaining the variation command reception processing in the sub-control board according to the effect reference example. It is a figure explaining the jackpot determination random number determination table for special 1 based on an Example. It is a figure explaining the jackpot determination random number determination table for special 2 based on an Example. It is a figure explaining the hit design random number determination table which concerns on an Example. It is a figure explaining the 1st special electric accessary product operation ram set table which concerns on an Example. It is a diagram for explaining a second special electric accessary product operating ram set table according to the embodiment. (a) is a diagram for explaining a game state setting table 1 according to the embodiment, and (b) is a diagram for explaining a game state setting table 2 according to the embodiment. It is a figure explaining the hit determination random number determination table which concerns on an Example. (a) is a diagram for explaining a normal symbol variation time data table according to the embodiment, and (b) is a diagram for explaining an opening/closing control pattern table according to the embodiment. It is a figure explaining the game flow of the gaming machine concerning an Example. 9 is a flowchart for explaining subcommand group set processing in the main control board according to the embodiment; It is a flow chart for explaining a special symbol variation waiting process in the main control board according to the embodiment. It is a flow chart explaining the special design design determination processing in the main control board according to the embodiment. It is a flow chart for explaining a special symbol stop symbol display process in the main control board according to the embodiment. 6 is a flowchart for explaining a number cutting management process in the main control board according to the embodiment; 10 is a flowchart for explaining specific failure state setting processing in the main control board according to the embodiment; It is a flow chart for explaining a big winning opening end wait process in the main control board according to the embodiment. 6 is a flowchart for explaining state setting processing in the main control board according to the embodiment; It is a flow chart for explaining normal symbol variation waiting processing in the main control board according to the embodiment. It is a flow chart for explaining the process during normal symbol fluctuation in the main control board according to the embodiment. It is a flow chart for explaining a normal symbol stop symbol display process in the main control board according to the embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of the production|presentation mode which concerns on an Example. It is a figure explaining an example of the fluctuation|variation production|presentation of the normal mode which concerns on an Example. It is a figure explaining an example of the change production|presentation of chance mode which concerns on an Example. It is a figure explaining an example of the variation production|presentation of B mode which concerns on an Example. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of an operation instruction effect according to the embodiment; 5 is a time chart of an operation instruction effect according to the embodiment; FIG. 10 is a time chart of the final variation of the advantageous state according to the comparative example; FIG. It is a figure explaining the relationship between the game state and fluctuation time which concern on an Example. 4 is a time chart of the final change of the advantageous state according to the embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a result effect according to the embodiment; FIG. 4 is a time chart of result effects according to the example. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of a state change suggestion effect according to the embodiment; FIG. 10 is a time chart of a result production during irregular times according to the embodiment; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a state change suggestion effect during an irregular state according to the embodiment; FIG. 11 is a time chart of a state change suggesting effect during an irregular state according to the embodiment; FIG. It is a figure explaining an example of the production|presentation at the time of irregularity in the slight time saving game state which concerns on an Example. It is a figure explaining an example of the production|presentation at the time of irregularity in an advantageous state which concerns on an Example. It is a figure explaining an example of the production|presentation at the time of power-off and power-on again being made during the slight time saving game state which concerns on an Example. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect when the power is turned off and then turned on again during an advantageous state according to the embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating another example of the effect when the power is turned off and then turned on again during the advantageous state according to the embodiment; FIG. 10 is a first diagram illustrating a demonstration effect according to the example; FIG. 11 is a second diagram illustrating a demonstration effect according to the example; 9 is a flowchart for explaining sub timer interrupt processing in the sub control board according to the embodiment; It is a flowchart explaining the production|presentation control processing in the sub-control board which concerns on an Example. It is a flow chart explaining the production mode control processing in the sub-control board according to the embodiment. It is a flow chart explaining result production control processing in the sub-control board according to the embodiment. It is a flow chart explaining the state change suggestion effect control processing in the sub-control board according to the embodiment. It is a flow chart explaining the variation effect control processing in the sub-control board according to the embodiment. It is a flow chart explaining the both customers waiting state release processing in the sub-control board according to the embodiment. It is a flow chart explaining the special discount customer waiting state cancellation processing in the sub-control board according to the embodiment. It is a flow chart explaining normal figure customer waiting state cancellation processing in a sub control board concerning an example. It is a flow chart explaining the customer waiting state setting processing in the sub-control board according to the embodiment. It is a flow chart explaining the demonstration production control processing in the sub-control board according to the embodiment.

Preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail below with reference to the accompanying drawings. The dimensions, materials, and other specific numerical values shown in these examples are merely examples for facilitating understanding of the invention, and do not limit the invention unless otherwise specified. In the present specification and drawings, elements having substantially the same function and configuration are given the same reference numerals to omit redundant description, and elements that are not directly related to the present invention are omitted from the drawings. do.

In order to facilitate understanding of the embodiments of the present invention, first, as a 1-2 type reference example, the mechanical configuration and electrical configuration of a so-called 1-2 type mixed game machine, and specific processing on each board will be described. . Next, as an effect reference example, a specific effect that can be executed in a one-and-two mixed game machine and a specific process related to the effect will be described. After that, as an example of the present invention, a configuration different from the one-two reference example will be specifically described.

<Type 1 and Type 2 Reference Example>
FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a gaming machine 100 according to a type 1 and 2 reference example, showing a state in which the door is opened. As shown, the gaming machine 100 includes an outer frame 102 in which a space is formed by four sides assembled in a substantially rectangular shape, a middle frame 104 attached to the outer frame 102 by a hinge mechanism so as to be freely opened and closed, and the A front frame 106 attached to the middle frame 104 by a hinge mechanism so as to be openable and closable is provided.

Like the outer frame 102, the middle frame 104 has a surrounding space formed by four sides assembled in a substantially rectangular shape, and a game board 108 is held in this surrounding space. Further, the front frame 106 holds a transmission plate 110 made of glass or resin. When the middle frame 104 and the front frame 106 are closed with respect to the outer frame 102, the game board 108 and the transmission plate 110 face each other substantially parallel to each other while maintaining a predetermined distance. , the game board 108 becomes visible through the transparent plate 110 .

FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming machine 100 according to the 1-2 type reference example. As shown in this figure, an operation handle 112 projecting toward the front side of the gaming machine 100 is provided at the lower portion of the front frame 106 . The operating handle 112 is provided so that the player can rotate it, and when the player rotates the operating handle 112 to perform a shooting operation, the strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the operating handle 112 is applied (not shown). A game ball is shot by the shooting mechanism. The game ball shot in this manner rises between rails 114 a and 114 b provided on the game board 108 and is guided to the game area 116 .

The game area 116 is a space formed between the game board 108 and the transmission plate 110, and is an area in which game balls can flow down or roll. The game board 108 is provided with a large number of nails and windmills, and the game balls guided to the game area 116 collide with the nails and the windmills to flow down and roll in irregular directions.

The game area 116 is provided with a first game area 116a and a second game area 116b in which the degree of entry of game balls differs from each other according to the firing intensity of the shooting mechanism. The first game area 116a is located on the left side of the game area 116 when viewed from the player facing the gaming machine 100, and the second game area 116b is located on the left side of the game area 116 when viewed from the player facing the gaming machine 100. located on the right side of the Since the rails 114a and 114b are located on the left side of the game area 116, the game ball fired by the shooting mechanism with a shooting intensity lower than a predetermined intensity enters the first game area 116a and is shot with a shooting intensity equal to or higher than the predetermined intensity. The played game ball enters the second game area 116b.

In addition, the game area 116 is provided with a general winning opening 118, a first starting opening 120, and a second starting opening 122 into which game balls can enter. When a game ball enters the second start port 122, a predetermined prize ball is paid out to the player. The number of prize balls may be any number as long as it is one or more, and the number of prize balls to be paid out may be different for each of the general prize winning opening 118, the first starting opening 120, and the second starting opening 122. , may be set to the same number of prize balls. At this time, it is also possible to set the number of winning balls to be put out by entering the first starting port 120 to be smaller than the number of winning balls to be put out by entering the second starting port 122.例文帳に追加be.

Although details will be described later, a first starting region is provided within the first starting port 120 and a second starting region is provided within the second starting port 122 . Then, when the game ball enters the first start port 120 or the second start port 122 and enters the first start area or the second start area, one of a plurality of special symbols provided in advance is selected. A lottery is held to determine 1 special symbol. Each special symbol is associated with various game benefits such as whether or not a big winning game or a small win game that is advantageous to the player can be executed, and what kind of game state the subsequent game state should be. Therefore, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 120 or the second starting hole 122, the player can obtain a predetermined prize ball and at the same time obtain an opportunity to obtain rights to receive various game benefits. becomes.

The first starting port 120 is the lower part of the game area 116, and only the game balls flowing down the first game area 116a can be entered, or the game balls that have entered the first game area 116a are better. , is arranged at a position where it is easier to enter than the game ball that has entered the second game area 116b.

In addition, the second starting port 122 is located in the second game area 116b, and only the game ball flowing down the second game area 116b can be entered, or the game that has entered the second game area 116b The ball is arranged at a position where it is easier to enter than the game ball that has entered the first game area 116a. The second starting port 122 is configured by a variable starting port (starting variable winning device) having a movable piece 122b, and the ease with which a game ball enters the second starting port 122 is variable. Specifically, the second starting port 122 is provided with a movable piece 122b that can be opened and closed. It is difficult. Although the specific configuration of the second starting port 122 is not particularly limited, here, the movable piece 122b is retracted into the back side of the game board 108 in the closed state, and the front side of the game board 108 in the open state. shall protrude to

On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the gate 124 provided in the second game area 116b, it is determined whether or not to execute the auxiliary game in which the second starting port 122 is opened, and the execution of the auxiliary game is determined. Then, an auxiliary game in which the opening and closing of the second starting port 122 is controlled is executed. More specifically, on the condition that the game ball has passed through the gate 124, a lottery for a normal pattern, which will be described later, is performed. In this way, when the movable piece 122b is in the open state, the movable piece 122b functions as a tray that guides the game ball to the second starting hole 122, making it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 122.

Further, a first big prize winning port 126 and a second big winning prize port 128 are provided in the lower part of the game area 116 . The first big winning hole 126 and the second big winning hole 128 are arranged at positions where game balls flowing down at least the second game area 116b can enter. An opening/closing door 126b is provided in the first big winning hole 126 so that it can be opened and closed. Ball is not possible. On the other hand, when the above-mentioned big win game is executed, the opening/closing door 126b is opened, the opening/closing door 126b functions as a tray, and the game ball can enter the first big winning hole 126.例文帳に追加When a game ball enters the first big winning hole 126, a predetermined prize ball is paid out to the player.

In addition, a movable piece 128b is provided in the second big winning opening 128 so that it can be opened and closed. It is impossible to enter the ball. On the other hand, when the above-mentioned small winning game is executed, the movable piece 128b is opened, the movable piece 128b functions as a tray, and the entry of the game ball into the second big winning hole 128 becomes possible. . Then, when a game ball enters the second big winning hole 128, a predetermined prize ball is paid out to the player. Incidentally, the first big prize opening 126 and the second big prize opening 128 are collectively referred to simply as the big prize opening. A large winning area is provided in the large winning opening, and predetermined prize balls are paid out by entering the game ball into the large winning area. That is, it can be said that the big winning area is opened and closed in the big win game or the small winning game.

FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the second big prize opening 128 according to the first and second reference examples. A structure 129 projecting to the front side of the game board 108 is provided in the second game area 116b. This structure 129 has an opening formed in the upper part, and this opening becomes the second big prize winning opening 128 . A movable piece 128b is provided on the upper part of the structure 129, and normally, as shown in FIG. .

The movable piece 128b faces above the game machine 100 and protrudes into the game area 116 where the game ball rolls and flows down. Therefore, when the movable piece 128b is maintained in the closed state, the game ball flowing down the game area 116 (second game area 116b) falls on the movable piece 128b. Here, the movable piece 128b maintained in the closed state is inclined so that the left side of the gaming machine 100 is slightly lower than the right side. Therefore, when the movable piece 128b is in the closed state, as indicated by the arrow in FIG. will move.

Then, when a small winning game, which will be described later, is executed, the movable piece 128b shifts to an open state in which the second big winning opening 128 is opened. Here, as shown in FIGS. 3A and 3B, the movable piece 128b is moved from a hole formed in the game board 108 by an actuator (solenoid) (not shown) in the front and back direction of the game machine 100 (front and back). direction). Normally, the actuator is kept in a non-energized state, and the movable piece 128b is held at a position protruding forward from the hole in the game board 108 to close the second big winning hole 128. As shown in FIG. When the actuator is energized, as shown in FIG. 3B, the movable piece 128b is held at a position that is retracted toward the rear side of the hole in the game board 108, and the second prize winning opening 128 is opened. be. In this way, the game ball enters the second big winning hole 128 when the second big winning hole 128 is open.

A lead-out path 128d is provided inside the second big winning hole 128, and the second big winning hole 128 guides the game ball entering the second big winning hole 128 to the lead-out way 128d. It is slanted so that the The lead-out path 128d is provided with a specific area 140b and a non-specific area 140c, which are holes through which a game ball can pass. It is configured to be discharged to the back side of the game board 108 through any of the specific areas 140c.

A movable member 142 that opens and closes the specific area 140b and the non-specific area 140c is provided in the second big prize winning opening 128. As shown in FIG. This movable member 142 is switched between a state in which entry of game balls into the specific region 140b is allowed and a state in which entry of game balls into the specific region 140b is disabled by its movement (sliding). More specifically, when the movable member 142 is displaced to the position shown in FIG. 3(c), the non-specific area 140c is blocked by the movable member 142, and the game ball can pass through the specific area 140b. On the other hand, when the movable member 142 is displaced to the position shown in FIG. 3(d), the specified area 140b is blocked by the movable member 142, and the game ball can pass through the non-specified area 140c. Although details will be described later, when the game ball enters the specific area 140b in the small winning game, it becomes a big win (two kinds of big wins), and the above-mentioned big winning game is started.

Returning to FIG. 2, at the bottom of the game area 116, a ball enters any of the general winning opening 118, the first starting opening 120, the second starting opening 122, the first big winning opening 126, and the second big winning opening 128. A discharge port 130 is provided for discharging unused game balls from the game area 116 to the back side of the game board 108 .

The game machine 100 includes a performance display device 200 made of a liquid crystal display device, a performance accessory device 202 made of a movable device, and various lighting modes and light emission colors as performance devices for performing performance during the progress of the game. A production lighting device 204 consisting of a lamp, a sound output device 206 consisting of a speaker, and a production button 208 for receiving the player's operation are provided.

The effect display device 200 includes a main effect display section 200a and a sub-effect display section 201a each having an image display section for displaying an image. The main effect display section 200 a is arranged in a substantially central portion of the game board 108 so as to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine 100 . Effect symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are variably displayed on the main effect display section 200a as shown in the figure, and the player is notified of the result of the big role lottery by the stopped display mode of each of these effect symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c. The performance will be executed. Also, the sub-effect display portion 201a is provided above the main effect display portion 200a, and an auxiliary effect image is displayed during the variable effect.

The effect accessory device 202 is arranged in front of the main effect display section 200a and normally retracts to the back side of the game board 108. It is movable up to the front of the main effect display part 200a to give the player a feeling of anticipation of a big win.

The effect lighting device 204 is provided in the effect accessory device 202, the game board 108, etc., and is variously controlled to be lit according to the image displayed on the main effect display section 200a.

The audio output device 206 is provided at an upper position of the front frame 106 or a lowermost position of the outer frame 102, and outputs various sounds toward the front side of the gaming machine 100 according to the image displayed on the main effect display section 200a. Output audio.

The effect button 208 is configured by a button that receives a player's pressing operation, and is provided at a substantially central position in the width direction of the gaming machine 100 and at a position lower than the transparent plate 110 . This effect button 208 is activated according to the image displayed on the main effect display section 200a, and when the player's operation is received within the operation valid time, various effects are produced in accordance with the operation. is executed.

In the figure, reference numeral 132 denotes an upper plate into which prize balls paid out from the gaming machine 100 and game balls rented from the game ball lending device are guided. It will be guided to the lower plate 134 . Also, the bottom surface of the lower tray 134 is formed with a ball removal hole (not shown) for ejecting game balls from the lower tray 134 . This ball extraction hole is normally closed by an opening/closing plate (not shown), but when the ball removal knob 134a is pushed in, the opening/closing plate slides integrally with the ball removal knob 134a to open the ball removal hole. It is possible to discharge the game ball from the lower tray 134 from the bottom.

In addition, on the game board 108, a first special symbol display device 160, a second special symbol display device 162, a first special symbol holding device, and a first special symbol display device 160, a second special symbol display device 162, and a first special symbol reserve are provided outside the game area 116 and at positions visible to the player. A display device 164, a second special symbol reservation display device 166, a normal symbol display device 168, a normal symbol reservation display device 170, and a right-handed information display device 172 are provided. Each of these displays 160 to 172 is a device for displaying various situations relating to the game, and the details thereof will be described later.

(Internal configuration of control means)
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of control means for controlling the progress of a game according to the first and second reference examples.

The main control board 300 controls the basic operations of the game. The main control board 300 includes a main CPU 300a, a main ROM 300b, and a main RAM 300c. The main CPU 300a reads the program stored in the main ROM 300b based on the input signals from the detection switches and timers and performs arithmetic processing, and directly controls each device and display, or the result of the arithmetic processing. Send commands to other boards accordingly. The main RAM 300c functions as a data work area during arithmetic processing of the main CPU 300a.

The game machine 100 according to the first and second reference examples is a special game that is started mainly by entering a game ball into the first start port 120 or the second start port 122, and by passing the game ball through the gate 124. It is roughly divided into a normal game that is started. The main ROM 300b of the main control board 300 stores various programs for progressing special games and normal games, data necessary for various games, and tables.

The main control board 300 includes a general winning hole detection switch 118s for detecting that a game ball has entered the general winning hole 118, and a first starting hole for detecting that a game ball has entered the first starting hole 120. A detection switch 120s, a second start opening detection switch 122s for detecting that a game ball has entered the second start opening 122, a gate detection switch 124s for detecting that a game ball has passed through the gate 124, and a first big winning opening. A first big winning hole detection switch 126s for detecting that a game ball has entered the 126, a second big winning hole detection switch 128s for detecting that a game ball has entered the second big winning hole 128, and a specific area 140b. A specific area detection switch 140s for detecting that a game ball has entered the game area 116, and an out ball detection switch 130s for detecting a game ball discharged from the game area 116 are connected. A signal is input.

In addition, a confluence passage is provided on the back of the game board 108, and the player can enter the general winning opening 118, the first starting opening 120, the second starting opening 122, the first big winning opening 126, and the second big winning opening 128, respectively. It is configured such that the played game ball and the game ball guided to the rear side from the discharge port 130 are merged in a confluence passage and guided to the equipment of the game hall. The out ball detection switch 130s is provided in the confluence passage, and all game balls discharged from the game area 116, in other words, all game balls shot into the game area 116 are detected by the out ball detection switch 130s. detected.

In addition, the main control board 300 includes a normal electric accessory solenoid 122c that operates the movable piece 122b of the second starting port 122, and a first large prize winning port solenoid 126c that operates the open/close door 126b that opens and closes the first large winning port 126. , a second large prize winning port solenoid 128c that operates a movable piece 128b that opens and closes the second large prize winning port 128, and a movable member driving solenoid 142c that moves a movable member 142 provided in the second large prize winning port 128 are connected. The main control board 300 controls the opening and closing of the second starting opening 122, the first big winning opening 126, the second big winning opening 128 and the specific area 140b.

Furthermore, the main control board 300 includes a first special symbol display 160, a second special symbol display 162, a first special symbol reservation display 164, a second special symbol reservation display 166, a normal symbol display 168, and a normal symbol display. A symbol holding indicator 170 and a right-handed information indicator 172 are connected, and the main control board 300 controls the display of each of these indicators.

Also, in the game machine 100, a radio wave detection sensor that detects radio waves, a magnetism detection sensor that detects magnetism, a door open sensor that detects the open state of the middle frame 104 and the front frame 106, etc. may be abnormal or fraudulent. A plurality of abnormality detection sensors 174 are provided to detect this, and an abnormality detection signal is input to the main control board 300 from each abnormality detection sensor 174 .

Furthermore, on the back surface of the game board 108, a setting change switch 180s is provided. The setting change switch 180s is configured to be accessible with a dedicated key. Under the condition that the setting change switch 180s is turned on, the setting value can be changed and confirmed. Although details will be described later, in the gaming machine 100 according to the 1st and 2nd reference examples, any one of six levels of setting values with different degrees of advantage is stored as a registered setting value in the setting value buffer, and the stored registered setting value is stored. The game progresses accordingly.

Further, a RAM clear button is provided on the back surface of the game board 108 so that it can be pressed, and the RAM clear switch 182s detects the pressing operation of the RAM clear button. The RAM clear switch 182s is connected to the main control board 300, and a RAM clear operation signal is input to the main control board 300 from the RAM clear switch 182s. If a RAM clear operation signal is input from the RAM clear switch 182s when power is turned on, the main CPU 300a clears the main RAM 300c.

A performance display monitor 184 is provided on the back of the game board 108 . The main control board 300 displays the registered set values and the base ratio on the performance display monitor 184 .

A payout control board 310 and a sub control board 330 are connected to the main control board 300 .

The payout control board 310 performs control for shooting game balls and payout prize balls. This payout control board 310 also includes a CPU, ROM, and RAM, and is connected to the main control board 300 so as to be able to communicate bidirectionally. A game information output terminal board 312 is connected to the payout control board 310 , and various information on the progress of the game output from the main control board 300 is transmitted via the payout control board 310 and the game information output terminal board 312 . , is output to a hall computer or the like of the amusement arcade.

The payout control board 310 is also connected to a payout motor 314 for paying out the game balls stored in the storage portion to the player as prize balls. The payout control board 310 controls the payout motor 314 based on the payout number designation command transmitted from the main control board 300 to pay out predetermined prize balls to the player. At this time, the number of put-out game balls is detected by the put-out ball counting switch 316s, and it is grasped whether the prize balls to be put out have been put out to the player.

Further, the payout control board 310 is connected with a full-dish detection switch 318 s for detecting the full state of the lower tray 134 . This full-dish detection switch 318s is provided in a passage leading game balls paid out as prize balls to the lower tray 134, and every time a game ball passes through the passage, a game ball detection signal is sent to the payout control board 310. It is designed to be entered.

Then, when the lower tray 134 is filled with a predetermined amount or more of game balls, the game balls stay in the passage toward the lower tray 134, and are directed toward the payout control board 310 from the tray full detection switch 318s. , the game ball detection signal is continuously input. The payout control board 310 determines that the lower tray 134 is full when the game ball detection signal is continuously input for a predetermined period of time, and transmits a full tray command to the main control board 300 . On the other hand, when the continuous input of the game ball detection signal is interrupted after the full-dish command is transmitted, it is determined that the full-drained state is canceled, and the full-dish full-drain release command is transmitted to the main control board 300 .

A launch control circuit 320 is connected to the payout control board 310 so as to be able to communicate bidirectionally. This firing control circuit 320 permits firing when receiving the firing control data from the payout control board 310 . The shooting control circuit 320 is connected with a touch sensor 112s provided on the operating handle 112 for detecting that the player touches the operating handle 112, and an operation volume 112a for detecting the operating angle of the operating handle 112. It is When a signal is input from the touch sensor 112s and the operation volume 112a, the shooting control circuit 320 controls the shooting solenoid 112c provided in the game ball shooting device to energize and shoot the game ball.

The sub-control board 330 mainly controls each effect such as during a game or during standby. The sub-control board 330 includes a sub-CPU 330a, a sub-ROM 330b, a sub-RAM 330c, and an RTC 330d. ing. The sub CPU 330a reads the program stored in the sub ROM 330b based on the command transmitted from the main control board 300, the input signal from the timer, etc., performs arithmetic processing, and executes and controls the performance. At this time, the sub-RAM 330c functions as a data work area during the arithmetic processing of the sub-CPU 330a.

Specifically, the sub-control board 330 performs image display control for displaying images on the main effect display section 200a and the sub-effect display section 201a. The sub ROM 330b stores a large amount of various image data to be displayed on the main effect display section 200a and the sub effect display section 201a. It controls the image display of the effect display section 200a and the sub-effect display section 201a.

In addition, the sub control board 330 actuates the performance accessory device 202 and controls the lighting of the performance lighting device 204, and performs voice output control for outputting voice from the voice output device 206. FIG. Furthermore, when an operation detection signal is input from the production button detection switch 208s for detecting that the production button 208 has been pressed, a predetermined production is executed.

A power supply board (not shown) is connected to each board, and power is supplied to each board from a commercial power supply via the power supply board. Also, the power supply board is provided with a backup power supply comprising a capacitor. The RTC 330d provided on the sub-control board 330 receives power supply from this backup power supply and measures the current time.

FIG. 5 is an address map of a memory area used by the main CPU 300a according to the first and second reference examples. In FIG. 5, addresses are shown in hexadecimal numbers, and "H" indicates hexadecimal numbers. As shown in FIG. 5, the memory area used by the main CPU 300a includes a memory area (0000H to 2FFFH) allocated to the main ROM 300b and a memory area (F000H to F3FFH) allocated to the main RAM 300c.

The memory area of the main ROM 300b consists of a use area (0000H to 1A7AH) for storing programs and data for controlling the progress of the game, and an area other than the use area, which is used for processing tests defined by gaming machine regulations. and an unused area (2000H to 2BFFH) for storing programs and data for executing processing for displaying the performance display monitor 184 (including processing for calculating the base ratio to be displayed on the performance display monitor 184) and are provided.

The area used in the main ROM 300b includes a program area (0000H to 0A89H) that stores programs for controlling the progress of games, an unused area (0A8AH to 0FFFH), and a data area (1000H that stores data other than programs). ~ 1A7AH) are provided. Note that the used area may not include the unused area (0A8AH to 0FFFH).

The non-use area of the main ROM 300b is a program area (2000H to 27FFH) for storing programs for executing processes for performing tests stipulated by game machine regulations and processes for displaying the performance display monitor 184, A data area (2800H to 2BFFH) is provided for storing data other than these programs.

In addition to the used area and the unused area, the memory area of the main ROM 300b also includes an unused area (1A7BH to 1DFFH), a ROM comment area (1E00H to 1EFFH) in which arbitrary data such as program titles and versions are stored. ), an unused area (1F00H to 1FFFH), an unused area (2C00H to 2FBFH), and a program management area (2FC0H to 2FFFH) in which information necessary for main CPU 300a to execute a program is stored.

The memory area of the main RAM 300c is a use area (F000H to F1FFH) that is temporarily used when a program for controlling the progress of a game is being executed, and an area other than the use area. A non-use area (F210H to F228H) that is temporarily used when a program for performing a predetermined test or processing for displaying the performance display monitor 184 is executed is provided.

The area used in the main RAM 300c includes a work area (F000H to F12AH) that is temporarily used when a program for controlling the progress of the game is executed, an unused area (F12BH to F1D7H), A stack area (F1D8H to F1FFH) is provided for temporarily saving data during execution of a control program. Note that the used area may not include the unused area (F12BH to F1D7H).

In the non-use area of the main RAM 300c, there is a work area (F210H to F21FH), and a stack area (F220H to F228H) for temporarily saving data while these programs are being executed.

The memory area of the main RAM 300c also has unused areas (F200H to F20FH) and unused areas (F229H to F3FFH) in addition to the used area and the unused area.

In this way, the main ROM 300b and the main RAM 300c have a usable area for controlling the progress of the game, a processing for performing a test stipulated by gaming machine regulations, and a processing for controlling the display of the performance display monitor 184. are provided separately from the non-use area used for executing the

In the main RAM 300c, a 16-byte unused area (F200H to F20FH) is provided between the used area and the unused area. This unused area (F200H to F20FH) is set as a boundary area separating the used area and the unused area, and the boundary between the used area and the unused area becomes clear, and the program for controlling the progress of the game When the non-use area is used during execution, and when the program of the processing for performing the test stipulated by the gaming machine regulations and the processing for controlling the display of the performance display monitor 184 is being executed It prevents the used area from being used.

The unused area provided between the used area and the unused area should be at least 1 byte or more, preferably 4 bytes or more from the viewpoint of fraud prevention, and is set to 16 bytes or more. is more desirable. Also, although the unused area is prohibited from writing and reading data, it may be cleared at a predetermined timing from the viewpoint of fraud prevention.

Next, a game in the gaming machine 100 according to the 1-2 type reference example will be described together with various tables stored in the main ROM 300b.

As described above, in the gaming machine 100 according to the 1-2 type reference example, two types of games, the special game and the normal game, progress in parallel. The game progresses in either the time-saving game state or the time-saving game state.

The details of each game state will be described later, but the non-time-saving game state is a game state in which the movable piece 122b is difficult to open, and the game ball is difficult to enter the second start port 122, and the time-saving game state This is a game state in which the movable piece 122b is more likely to be in the open state than in the non-time-saving game state, and the game ball is more likely to enter the second start port 122. In addition, the initial state of the gaming machine 100 is set to a non-time-saving gaming state.

When the player operates the operation handle 112 to shoot the game ball into the game area 116, and the game ball flowing down the game area 116 enters the first start hole 120 or the second start hole 122, the player is asked to play the game. A lottery (hereinafter referred to as a "big role lottery") is held to decide whether or not to give a profit. In this big win lottery, when a big win or a small win is won, the first big winning hole 126 and the second big winning hole 128 are opened, and the game balls flow into the first big winning hole 126 and the second big winning hole 128. A big winning game or a small winning game in which a ball can be entered is executed. In addition, one of the game states described above is set as the game state after the end of the big win game. Below, the major role lottery method will be described.

Although details will be described later, when a game ball enters the first start port 120 or the second start port 122, various random numbers related to the big role lottery (jackpot determination random number, winning pattern random number, reach group determination random number, reach mode determination random number, variation pattern random number) are acquired, and each random value is stored in the special figure reservation storage area of the main RAM 300c. Hereinafter, various random numbers stored in the special figure reservation storage area after the game ball enters the first start port 120 are collectively referred to as special 1 reservation, and the game ball enters the second start port 122. Various random numbers stored in the special figure reservation storage area are collectively called special 2 reservation.

The special figure reservation storage area of the main RAM 300c includes a first special figure reservation storage area and a second special figure reservation storage area. The first special figure reservation storage area and the second special figure reservation storage area each have four storage units (first to fourth storage units). Then, when the game ball enters the first start port 120, the special 1 reservation is stored in order from the first storage part of the first special figure reservation storage area, and when the game ball enters the second start port 122, special 2 reservation is stored in order from the first storage part of the second special figure reservation storage area.

For example, when the game ball enters the first start port 120, if the reservation is not stored in any of the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the first special figure reservation storage area, the first storage Store special 1 pending in part. Also, for example, in a state in which special 1 suspension is stored in the first storage unit to the third storage unit, when the game ball enters the first start port 120, special 1 suspension is stored in the fourth storage unit Remember. Also, when the game ball enters the second starting port 122, in the same manner as above, the special 2 reservation is stored in the first to fourth storage units of the second special figure reservation storage area. The special 2 hold is stored in the storage unit with the smallest number (ordinal number) that is not available.

However, the number of special 1 reservations (X1) and the number of special 2 reservations (X2) that can be stored in the first special figure reservation storage area and the second special figure reservation storage area are set to four respectively. Therefore, for example, when a game ball enters the first start port 120, if four special 1 reservations are already stored in the first special figure reservation storage area, the first start port 120 A special 1 suspension is not newly stored by the entry of a game ball. Similarly, when the game ball enters the second start port 122, if four special 2 reservations are already stored in the second special figure reservation storage area, the game to the second start port 122 A special 2 hold is not newly memorized by the entry of a ball.

FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a special 1 jackpot determination random number determination table according to the 1 type 2 type reference example. When a game ball enters the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 122, one jackpot determination random number is obtained from within the range of 0-65535. Then, when the big win lottery is started, that is, according to the game state when judging the big win, the big win determination random number determination table is selected, and the selected jackpot determination random number determination table and the acquired jackpot determination random number are used. A lottery will be held.

When starting the big win lottery for the special 1 reservation, the special 1 jackpot determination random number determination table is referred to. Here, in the 1st and 2nd reference examples, there are set values of 6 stages with different degrees of advantage, and the special 1 jackpot determination random number determination table is provided for each set value. During the game, the set value is set to one of six stages, and the special 1 jackpot decision random number judgment corresponding to the currently set set value (registered set value stored in the set value buffer) A lottery for major roles is conducted with reference to the table.

When the setting value is set to 1 (registered setting value=1), the big win lottery is performed with reference to the special 1 jackpot determination random number determination table a shown in FIG. 6(a). According to this special 1 jackpot determination random number determination table a, when the jackpot determination random number is 10001 to 10278, it is determined as a jackpot, when the jackpot determination random number is 20001 to 20655, it is determined as a small hit, and others If it is a big hit decision random number, it is determined as a loss. Therefore, the big win probability in this case is about 1/235.7, and the small win probability is about 1/100.0.

When the setting value is set to 2 (registered setting value=2), the big win lottery is performed with reference to the special 1 jackpot determination random number determination table b shown in FIG. 6(b). According to this special 1 jackpot determination random number determination table b, when the jackpot determination random number is 10001 to 10288, it is determined as a jackpot, when the jackpot determination random number is 20001 to 20655, it is determined as a small hit, and others If it is a big hit decision random number, it is determined as a loss. Therefore, the big win probability in this case is about 1/227.6, and the small win probability is about 1/100.0.

When the set value is set to 3 (registered set value=3), the big win lottery is performed with reference to the special 1 jackpot determination random number determination table c shown in FIG. 6(c). According to this special 1 jackpot determination random number determination table c, when the jackpot determination random number is 10001 to 10298, it is determined as a jackpot, when the jackpot determination random number is 20001 to 20655, it is determined as a small hit, and others If it is a big hit decision random number, it is determined as a loss. Therefore, the big win probability in this case is about 1/219.9, and the small win probability is about 1/100.0.

When the set value is set to 4 (registered set value=4), the big win lottery is performed with reference to the special 1 jackpot determination random number determination table d shown in FIG. 6(d). According to this special 1 jackpot determination random number determination table d, it is determined as a jackpot when the jackpot determination random number is 10001 to 10308, and when the jackpot determination random number is 20001 to 20655, it is determined as a small hit. If it is a big hit decision random number, it is determined as a loss. Therefore, the big win probability in this case is about 1/212.8, and the small win probability is about 1/100.0.

When the setting value is set to 5 (registered setting value=5), a big winning lottery is performed with reference to the special 1 jackpot determination random number determination table e shown in FIG. 6(e). According to this special 1 jackpot determination random number determination table e, when the jackpot determination random number is 10001 to 10318, it is determined as a jackpot, when the jackpot determination random number is 20001 to 20655, it is determined as a small hit, and others If it is a big hit decision random number, it is determined as a loss. Therefore, the big win probability in this case is about 1/206.1, and the small win probability is about 1/100.0.

When the set value is set to 6 (registered set value=6), the big win lottery is performed with reference to the special 1 jackpot determination random number determination table f shown in FIG. 6(f). According to this special 1 jackpot determination random number determination table f, when the jackpot determination random number is 10001 to 10328, it is determined as a jackpot, when the jackpot determination random number is 20001 to 0655, it is determined as a small hit, and others If it is a big hit decision random number, it is determined as a loss. Therefore, the big win probability in this case is about 1/199.8, and the small win probability is about 1/100.0.

FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a special 2 jackpot determination random number determination table according to the 1 type 2 type reference example. When the big win lottery is started for the special 2 reservation, the special 2 jackpot determination random number determination table is referred to. The special 2 jackpot determination random number determination table is also provided for each set value in the same manner as the special 1 jackpot determination random number determination table.

When the setting value is set to 1 (registered setting value=1), the big win lottery is performed with reference to the special 2 jackpot decision random number determination table a shown in FIG. 7(a). According to this special 2 jackpot determination random number determination table a, when the jackpot determination random number is 10001 to 10278, it is determined as a jackpot, when the jackpot determination random number is 20001 to 28856, it is determined as a small hit, and others If it is a big hit decision random number, it is determined as a loss. Therefore, the big win probability in this case is about 1/235.7, and the small win probability is about 1/7.4.

Similarly, when the setting value is set to 2 to 6 (registered setting value = 2 to 6), the special 2 jackpot determination random number determination table b to f shown in Fig. 7 (b) to (f) A lottery will be held with reference to this. According to these special 2 jackpot determination random number determination tables b to f, when the jackpot determination random numbers are the values shown in the figure, it is determined as a jackpot. Therefore, when the set value is 2 to 6, the big win probability is about 1/227.6 to 1/199.8, and the small win probability is about 1/7.4.

As described above, the major role lottery is performed according to the registered setting values. At this time, the probability of winning a big win differs according to the registered set value, and it is easier to win a big win when the registered set value is larger than when the registered set value is small. Here, even if the registered set values are different, the odds of winning the small win are not changed, but the odds of winning the small win may be changed for each registered set value. Also, the small win is not essential, and only one of the big win and the loss may be determined in the big win lottery.

FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining a winning symbol random number determination table according to the one-two type reference example. When a game ball enters the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 122, one winning symbol random number is obtained from within the range of 0-99. Then, when the judgment result of "big win" or "small win" is derived by the above-mentioned big win lottery, the type of the special symbol is determined by the acquired winning symbol random number and the winning symbol random number determination table. At this time, when a "big hit" is won by the special 1 reservation, as shown in FIG. If so, as shown in FIG. 8(b), the special 1 winning symbol random number determination table b is selected. Also, when a "big hit" is won by the special 2 reservation, as shown in FIG. 8(c), the special 2 winning symbol random number determination table a is selected, and a "small win" is won by the special 2 reservation. In this case, as shown in FIG. 8(d), the special 2 winning symbol random number determination table b is selected. In the following, the special pattern determined by the winning pattern random number, that is, the special pattern determined when the judgment result of the big hit is obtained is called the jackpot pattern, and it is decided when the judgment result of the small hit is obtained. A special symbol is called a small winning symbol, and a special symbol determined when a loss determination result is obtained is called a losing symbol.

According to the special 1 per symbol random number determination table a shown in FIG. 8(a) and the special 2 per symbol random number determination table a shown in FIG. 8(c), according to the value of the acquired per symbol random number, As illustrated, the type of special symbol (jackpot symbol) is determined. Also, according to the special 1 per symbol random number determination table b shown in FIG. 8(b) and the special 2 per symbol random number determination table b shown in FIG. Then, as illustrated, the type of special symbol (small hit symbol) is determined.

On the other hand, when the lottery result of the major role is "losing", when the lottery result is derived by the special 1 reservation, the special symbol X is determined as the losing symbol without performing the lottery. Further, when the lottery result of the major role is "losing", when the lottery result is derived by the special 2 reservation, the special symbol Y is determined as the losing symbol without performing the lottery.

That is, the winning symbol random number determination table is referred to only when the big win lottery result is "big win" or "small win", and is not referred to when the big win lottery result is "losing". Here, the same jackpot symbols are determined in the special 1 winning symbol random number determination table and the special 2 winning symbol random number determination table. However, different jackpot patterns may be determined in both tables, or the type of special pattern (jackpot pattern) may be determined by referring to a single hit pattern random number determination table regardless of the type of reservation. .

Here, although the selection ratio of the big winning design and the small winning design is common for all set values, either one or both of the big winning design and the small winning design may be changed for each set value.

FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining a reach group determination random number determination table according to the one-two type reference example. A plurality of reach group determination random number determination tables are provided, and a preset table is selected according to the type of hold, the number of holds, the game state, the variation state associated with the game state, and the like. When a game ball enters the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 122, one reach group determination random number is obtained from within the range of 0-10006. As described above, when the major role lottery result is derived, a process of determining a variation effect pattern (variation mode number, variation pattern number) for informing the major role lottery result is performed. In the 1st and 2nd reference example, when the big role lottery result is "losing", the group type is first determined by the ready-to-reach group determination random number and the ready-to-reach group determination random number determination table in determining the variable performance pattern. It should be noted that the variable state defines which table is referred to to determine the variable effect pattern, and is a concept that is set separately from the game state.

For example, when the gaming state is set to a non-time-saving gaming state, if the big role lottery result of "losing" is derived based on the special 1 hold, the number of special 1 holds held when performing the big lottery lottery ( Hereinafter, simply referred to as "holding number") is 0, reach group determination random number determination table 1 is selected as shown in FIG. 9(a). Similarly, when it is set to a non-time-saving gaming state, when the big role lottery result of "losing" is derived based on the special 1 reservation, if the number of reservations when performing the big lottery lottery is 1, As shown in FIG. 9(b), the reach group determination random number determination table 2 is selected, and if the number of reservations is 2 to 3, as shown in FIG. 9(c), the reach group determination random number determination table 3 selected. In addition, in FIG. 9, the group x described in the group type column indicates an arbitrary group number. Therefore, various group numbers are determined as group types according to the reach group determination random number obtained and the type of the reach group determination random number determination table to be referred to.

It should be noted that here, in the non-time-saving gaming state, based on the special 1 hold, the reach group determination random number determination table referred to when the large winning lottery result of "losing" is derived was described, but the main ROM 300b stores this In addition, many reach group determination random number determination tables are stored.

In addition, when the big role lottery result is "big win" or "small win", the group type is not determined when determining the variation production pattern. That is, the reach group determination random number determination table is referred only when the big win lottery result is "losing", and is not referred to when the big win lottery result is "big hit" or "minor win".

FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a reach mode determination random number determination table according to the one-two type reference example. This reach mode determination random number determination table is the reach mode determination random number determination table at the time of losing selected when the big role lottery result is "losing", and the big win selected when the big role lottery result is "big hit" It is roughly divided into a time reach mode determination random number determination table and a small win time reach mode determination random number determination table selected when the big winning lottery result is "small win". In addition, the reach mode determination random number determination table at the time of losing is provided for each group type determined as described above, and the reach mode determination random number determination table at the time of the big hit and the reach mode determination random number determination table at the time of the small hit are the pending type provided for each.

In addition, each ready-to-win mode decision random number determination table is provided for each game state and type of symbol. Here, FIG. 10A shows an example of the reach mode determination random number determination table for group x that is referred to in a predetermined game state and symbol type, and an example of the reach mode determination random number determination table for special 1 jackpot Shown in FIG. 10 (b), an example of a reach mode determination random number determination table for special 2 jackpot is shown in FIG. 10 (c), an example of a reach mode determination random number determination table for special 1 small hit is FIG. , and an example of the reach mode determination random number determination table for small hits for special 2 is shown in FIG. 10(e).

When a game ball enters the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 122, one reach mode determination random number is obtained from within the range of 0-250. Then, when the result of the big role lottery is "losing", as shown in FIG. A determination table is selected, and a variation mode number is determined based on the selected reach mode determination random number determination table at loss and the reach mode determination random number. Also, when the result of the big role lottery is "jackpot", as shown in FIGS. is selected, and the variation mode number is determined based on the selected reach mode determination random number determination table at the time of jackpot and the reach mode determination random number.

Furthermore, if the result of the big role lottery is "small hit", as shown in FIGS. A determination table is selected, and a variation mode number is determined based on the selected reach mode determination random number determination table and reach mode determination random number at the time of small hit.

Further, in each reach mode determination random number determination table, the reach mode determination random number is associated with a variation mode number and a variation pattern random number determination table described later. A random number decision table is determined. In FIG. 10, the table x described in the column of variation pattern random number determination table indicates an arbitrary table number. Therefore, the variation mode number and the table number of the variation pattern random number determination table are determined according to the acquired reach group determination random number and the type of the reach mode determination random number determination table to be referred to. In addition, in the one-kind-two reference example, the variation mode number and the variation pattern number, which will be described later, are set in hexadecimal. In the following description, hexadecimal numbers are indicated by "H", but ◯◯H in FIGS. 10 to 12 indicates arbitrary values represented by hexadecimal numbers.

As described above, when the winning lottery result is "lost", first, the group type is determined by the reach group determination random number determination table shown in FIG. 9 and the reach group determination random number. Then, according to the determined group type and gaming state, the variation mode number and the variation pattern random number determination table are determined by the reach mode determination random number determination table and the reach mode determination random number at the time of losing shown in FIG. 10(a).

On the other hand, if the big win lottery result is "big win" or "small win", the determined big win pattern or small win pattern (type of special pattern), the game state at the time of winning the big win or small win, etc. With reference to the corresponding reach mode determination random number determination table shown in FIG. 10, the reach mode determination random number is used to determine the variation mode number and the variation pattern random number determination table.

FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a variation pattern random number determination table according to the one-two type reference example. Here, a fluctuation pattern random number determination table x of a predetermined table number x is shown, but many other fluctuation pattern random number determination tables are provided for each table number.

When a game ball enters the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 122, one variation pattern random number is obtained from within the range of 0-238. Then, based on the variation pattern random number determination table determined at the same time as the variation mode number and the obtained variation pattern random number, the variation pattern number is determined as shown in the figure.

Thus, when the big role lottery is performed, the variation mode number and the variation pattern number are determined according to the big role lottery result, the determined symbol type, the game state, the number of reservations, the type of reservation, and the like. These variable mode number and variable pattern number specify the variable effect pattern, and each of them is associated with the mode and time of the variable effect.

FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating a variable time determination table according to the one-two reference example. When the variable mode number is determined as described above, variable time 1 is determined according to the variable time 1 determination table shown in FIG. 12(a). According to this variable time 1 determination table, variable time 1 is associated with each variable mode number, and the corresponding variable time 1 is determined according to the determined variable mode number.

Further, as described above, when the variation pattern number is determined, the variation time 2 is determined according to the variation time 2 determination table shown in FIG. 12(b). According to this variation time 2 determination table, variation time 2 is associated with each variation pattern number, and the corresponding variation time 2 is determined according to the determined variation pattern number. The total time of the variable times 1 and 2 determined in this way is the time of the variable effect for informing the result of the big role lottery, that is, the variable time.

When the variation mode number is determined as described above, a variation mode command corresponding to the determined variation mode number is transmitted to the sub control board 330, and when the variation pattern number is determined, the determined variation A variation pattern command corresponding to the pattern number is transmitted to the sub control board 330 . In the sub control board 330, mainly the first half of the variable performance is determined based on the received variable mode command, and the second half of the variable performance is mainly determined based on the received variable pattern command. However, the details will be described later. In the following description, the variation mode number and variation pattern number may be collectively referred to as variation information, and the variation mode command and variation pattern command may be collectively referred to as variation command.

FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the first special electric role product operating ramset table according to the first and second reference examples, and FIG. 14 shows the second special electric role product operating ramset table according to the first and second reference examples. It is a figure explaining. The first special electric role product operating ramset table and the second special electric role product operating ramset table store various data for controlling the big win game or the small win game, during the big win game and the small win. During the game, the first special prize winning opening solenoid 126c and the second prize winning opening solenoid 128c are energized and controlled with reference to the first special electric role product operating ram set table or the second special electric role product operating ram set table. . Hereinafter, the first special electric accessory operating ramset table and the second special electric accessory operating ramset table are collectively referred to simply as the special electric accessory operating ramset table. In fact, a plurality of special electric accessory actuating ramset tables are provided for each type of special symbols (both jackpot symbols and small winning symbols), and depending on the type of special symbol determined, the corresponding table plays a major role. Although it is set at the start of a game or a small winning game, here, for convenience of explanation, one table shows control data of all special symbols.

When the special symbols A, B, and C, which are the jackpot symbols, are determined, as shown in FIG. The opening/closing process for controlling opening/closing is executed. Further, when the special symbols a, b, and c, which are the small winning symbols, are determined, as shown in FIG. An opening/closing process is executed to control the opening/closing of the second prize winning opening 128 in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. The big winning game consists of a plurality of round games in which the first big winning opening 126 is opened and closed a predetermined number of times, and the small winning game is a round game in which the second big winning opening 128 opens and closes a predetermined number of times. be.

According to the special electric role product operation ram set table, the opening time (waiting time until the first round game starts), the maximum number of times of special electric role product operation (executed during one big role game or small winning game number of round games to be played), open big prize mouth (first big prize mouth 126 and second big prize mouth 128 opened in each round game), number of opening and closing special electric accessories (first The number of openings of the large winning opening 126 and the second large winning opening 128), the solenoid energization time (the first large winning opening solenoid 126c and the second large winning opening for each opening number of the first large winning opening 126 and the second large winning opening 128) The energization time of the mouth solenoid 128c, that is, the opening time of the first big prize mouth 126 and the second big prize mouth 128 once), the specified number (the first big prize mouth 126 and the second big prize in one round game Maximum possible number of wins to the mouth 128), closing effective time of the big winning mouth (closing time of the first big winning mouth 126 and the second big winning mouth 128 between round games, that is, interval time between rounds), ending time (last The waiting time from the end of the round game to the restart of the normal special game) is stored in advance as shown in the figure for each type of jackpot symbol as the control data for the big win game.

In the one-and-two reference example, when the special symbol A, which is a jackpot symbol, is determined, a big win game consisting of four round games is executed, and when the special symbols B and C are determined, fifteen times. A big win game consisting of a round game is executed. In each round game, a specified number (7) of game balls enter the first big prize winning port 126, or a predetermined time (29.0 seconds) has passed since the first big winning port 126 was opened. Then it ends.

Also, as shown in FIG. 14, when special symbols a, b, and c, which are small winning symbols, are determined, first, a small winning game composed of one round game is executed. In this small winning game, the opening and closing of the second big winning opening 128 are repeatedly executed. In the small winning game in which the special symbol a is determined and executed, the second big winning opening 128 is opened only once for 0.1 seconds. In addition, in the small winning game in which the special symbols b and c are determined and executed, the second big winning opening 128 is opened (open 1) for 0.1 seconds, closed (closed 1) for 3.0 seconds, and closed for 0.1 seconds. 1 sec open (open 2), 1.0 sec closed (closed 2), 0.1 sec open (open 3), 1.0 sec closed (closed 3), 0.1 sec open (open 4) are controlled to open and close in order.

Here, a specific area 140b and a non-specific area 140c are provided inside the second large winning opening 128, and a game ball entering the second large winning opening 128 is always placed in the specific area 140b or the non-specific area. Enter region 140c. Then, in the small winning game, when the game ball entering the second large winning opening 128 enters the specific area 140b, following the small winning game, the big winning game in which the first large winning opening 126 is opened is performed. executed.

At this time, if the special symbols a and b, which are small winning symbols, are determined, the round game in which the first big winning opening 126 is opened once for 29.0 seconds is executed four times. Also, if the special symbol c, which is a small winning symbol, is determined, the round game is executed 15 times in the big win game.

15A and 15B are diagrams for explaining the opening/closing mode of the second big winning hole 128 and the opening/closing mode of the specific area 140b by the movable member 142 according to the first and second reference examples. As shown in FIG. 15, the movable member 142 moves the specific region 140b for a moment (about 0.1 second) at the same time as the second big winning opening 128 is opened in the small winning game in which the second big winning opening 128 is opened. After opening, the specific area 140b is maintained in a closed state for a predetermined period of time, and then the specific area 140b is maintained in an open state again. Then, as shown in FIG. 15 (a), when the special symbol a is determined and the small winning game is executed, only 0.1 seconds from the start of the small winning game (round game) Second big winning opening 128 is opened. During this time, it takes a predetermined time for the game ball entering the second big winning hole 128 to reach the specific area 140b. Therefore, when the game ball entering the second big winning hole 128 reaches the specific area 140b, the specific area 140b is always closed, and as a result, the special symbol a is determined and the small winning game is executed. In this case, the game ball does not enter the specific area 140b.

Unexpected situations such as game balls getting stuck in the second big winning hole 128, or game balls staying in the second big winning hole 128 for a long time for some reason, etc. occurs, there is a possibility that the game ball enters the specific area 140b even in the small winning game in which the special symbol a is determined and executed. Therefore, in this specification, the terms “always” and “certainly” are used to facilitate understanding, but this means that the state of the gaming machine 100 changes when the game progresses. It does not imply 100% physical, assuming proper condition and no unforeseen circumstances.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 15(b), when the special symbols b and c are determined and the small winning game is executed, the second big winning opening 128 is opened four times in total in the small winning game. be released. Therefore, there is a possibility that the game ball entering the second big winning hole 128 at the same time as the second big winning hole 128 is opened for the first time cannot enter the specific area 140b, but the second big winning hole 128 2nd and subsequent openings, the game ball entering the second big winning hole 128 can surely enter the specific area 140b. In addition, although detailed explanation is omitted, above the second big prize winning port 128, a structure that decelerates the game ball rolling on the second big prize winning port 128 is provided, and it is suitable from the start of the small winning game. When a game ball is launched into the second game area 116b, the game ball always enters the specific area 140b.

FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating a game state setting table for setting the game state after the end of the big win game according to the first and second reference examples. In the one-and-two type reference example, when the big win game is executed, the game state after the big win game is finished is set according to the type of the determined special symbol. According to this game state setting table, even when any of the special symbols A, B, C, a, b, and c is determined, the time saving game state is set after the end of the big win game.

In addition, when the game state is set to the time saving game state, the number of continuations of the time saving game state (hereinafter referred to as "time saving number of times") is set. Here, when the special symbols A and a are determined, the number of times of time saving is set to 1 time, and when the special symbols B, C, b, and c are determined, the number of times of time saving is set to 7 times. be. This means that the time-saving gaming state continues until the winning lottery result is determined once or seven times. However, the number of times of time saving mentioned above indicates the maximum number of continuous times in the time saving game state of 1, and if the jackpot is won before reaching the above number of continuations, the game state and the number of times of time saving are set again. will be performed. Therefore, when the time-saving game state is set after the end of the big role game, the lottery result of the losing or the small win is derived once or seven times without deriving the lottery result of the big win in the time-saving game state. , The game state is changed to a non-time-saving game state.

Here, in the time-saving game state, the remaining number of times of time-saving is subtracted every time the result of the winning lottery is decided, and when the remaining number of times of time-saving becomes 0, the game state is changed to the non-time-saving game state. At this time, the number of times of shortening of working hours is subtracted only when the big role lottery result based on special 2 reservation is decided. In other words, after the major role game, when the major role lottery result based on the special 2 reservation is determined once or seven times, the remaining number of times of time saving becomes 0, and the game state is changed to the non-time saving game state.

In addition, here, when the time-saving gaming state is set, the number of times of time-saving is set to be different according to the type of special symbol, but regardless of the type of special symbol, the number of times of time-saving is set to the same number. may Also, here, it was decided that the number of times of saving time is subtracted only when the result of the big role lottery based on the special 2 reservation is confirmed, but the number of times of saving time is also subtracted when the result of the big role lottery based on the special 1 reservation is confirmed. may be

FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating a winning determination random number determination table according to the one-two reference example. When the game ball flowing down the game area 116 passes through the gate 124, a normal symbol determination process (hereinafter referred to as "normal figure lottery") is associated with whether or not the movable piece 122b of the second start port 122 is energized. ) is performed.

Although details will be described later, when the game ball passes through the gate 124, one hit determination random number is acquired from within the range of 0 to 99, and four random numbers are stored in the normal figure reservation storage area of the main RAM 300c. is stored as the upper limit. That is, the general pattern reservation storage area has four storage units for saving the hit determination random numbers. Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 124 in a state in which the hit determination random numbers are stored in all the four storage portions of the normal pattern holding storage area, the hit determination random numbers are stored based on the passage of the game ball. never. In the following, the game ball passed through the gate 124 and the hit determination random number stored in the normal pattern reservation storage area is called normal pattern reservation.

When starting the normal figure lottery in the non-time-saving gaming state, as shown in FIG. According to this non-time-saving gaming state hit determination random number determination table, when the hit determination random number is 0, the hit design is determined as the type of normal design, and when the hit determination random number is 1 to 99, A lost pattern is determined as the type of the normal pattern. Therefore, the probability that winning symbols are determined in the non-time-saving gaming state, that is, the winning probability is 1/100. Although details will be described later, when the winning pattern is determined in this normal drawing lottery, the second starting port 122 is controlled to be opened, and when the losing pattern is determined, the second starting port 122 is closed. maintained.

In addition, when starting the normal figure lottery in the time saving game state, as shown in FIG. According to this time-saving gaming state hit determination random number determination table, when the hit determination random number is 0 to 98, the hit design is determined as the type of normal design, and when the hit determination random number is 99, normal A lost pattern is determined as the type of the pattern. Therefore, the probability that winning symbols are determined in the time-saving gaming state, that is, the winning probability is 99/100.

FIG. 18(a) is a diagram for explaining a normal symbol variation time data table according to the 1-2 type reference example, and FIG. 18(b) is a diagram for explaining an opening/closing control pattern table according to the 1-2 type reference example. be. As described above, when the general pattern lottery is performed, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is determined. The normal symbol variation time data table is referred to when determining the normal symbol variation time when a winning symbol or a losing symbol is determined by a normal symbol lottery. According to this normal symbol fluctuation time data table, when the game state is set to the non-time-saving game state, the fluctuation time is determined to be 10 seconds, and when the game state is set to the time-saving game state, it fluctuates. Time is determined to be 1 second. When the variable time is determined in this way, the normal symbol display 168 is variable-displayed (blinking-displayed) over the determined time. Then, when a winning symbol is determined, the normal symbol display 168 is lit, and when a losing symbol is determined, the normal symbol display 168 is extinguished.

Then, when the winning pattern is determined by the normal drawing lottery and the normal pattern display 168 is lit, the movable piece 122b of the second starting port 122 is changed to the opening and closing control pattern as shown in FIG. 18(b). Power supply is controlled by referring to the table. Actually, the opening/closing control pattern table is provided for each game state, and according to the game state when the normal symbol is determined, the corresponding table is set at the start of energization of the normal electric accessory solenoid 122c. However, here, for convenience of explanation, one table shows control data corresponding to each game state.

When the winning pattern is determined, as shown in FIG. 18(b), the opening/closing of the second start opening 122 is controlled with reference to the opening/closing control pattern table. According to this opening/closing control pattern table, the normal electric opening pre-opening time (waiting time until the opening of the second start port 122 is started), the normal electric accessory maximum opening/closing switching frequency (the number of times the second start port 122 is opened) , Solenoid energization time (energization time of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 122c for each opening of the second start port 122, that is, opening time of the second start port 122 once), specified number (all the second start ports 122 The maximum number of winnings to the second starting port 122 during opening), the normal power closing effective time (the closing time between each opening of the second starting port 122, that is, the rest time), the normal power valid state time (second starting The waiting time from the end of the last opening of the mouth 122), the normal electricity end wait time (after the normal electricity effective state time has elapsed, the waiting time until the fluctuation display of the normal pattern, which will be described later) is resumed, is the second start port 122 control data is stored in advance for each game state as shown.

Thus, in the non-time-saving game state and the time-saving game state, the opening/closing control conditions for opening and closing the second starting port 122 are respectively associated as game progress conditions, and in the time-saving game state, the non-time-saving A game ball enters the second starting port 122 more easily than in the game state. That is, in the time-saving game state, as long as the game ball passes through the gate 124, the normal drawing lottery is performed one after another, and the second start port 122 is frequently opened, so the player consumes the game ball. It is possible to perform a large role lottery while reducing the

The open/close condition of the second starting port 122 defines three elements: winning probability of normal symbols, variable display time of normal symbols, and opening time of the second starting port 122 . And, in the one and two reference examples, in two of these elements, by setting the time-saving gaming state more favorably than the non-time-saving gaming state, the time-saving gaming state is the second 2 The start port 122 is set so that the game ball can easily enter. However, one or three of the above three elements may be set more advantageously in the time-saving gaming state than in the non-time-saving gaming state. In any case, the time-saving gaming state is advantageous for at least one element compared to the non-time-saving gaming state, so the overall time-saving gaming state is the second start port than the non-time-saving gaming state. A game ball should be made to easily enter 122 . That is, when the game state is set to the non-time-saving game state, the opening and closing of the movable piece 122b is controlled according to the first condition, and when the game state is set to the time-saving game state, from the first condition The opening and closing of the movable piece 122b may be controlled in accordance with the second condition that makes it easy to open the movable piece 122b.

Next, main processing of the main control board 300 accompanying the progress of the game in the gaming machine 100 will be described.

FIG. 19 is a diagram for explaining gaming machine state flags according to the first and second reference examples. In the main control board 300, whether or not the game is ready to progress is managed by a gaming machine state flag. One of six types of flag values from 00H to 05H is set in the gaming machine state flag. The flag value of the gaming machine state flag=00H indicates a playable state. When the gaming machine state flag is 00H, the progress of the game is controlled. be stopped.

The flag value of the game machine state flag=01H indicates a setting change state, and when the game machine state flag is 01H, the registered set value can be changed. The flag value of the gaming machine state flag=02H indicates the setting confirmation state, and when the gaming machine state flag is 02H, the registered set value is displayed on the performance display monitor 184, and the registered set value is confirmed. It is possible to confirm. The flag value of the gaming machine state flag=03H indicates a setting abnormality state, and when the gaming machine state flag is 03H, the game is stopped as the registered setting value is abnormal. The flag value of the gaming machine state flag=04H indicates a RAM abnormal state, and when the gaming machine state flag is 04H, the game is stopped. The flag value of the gaming machine status flag=05H indicates an abnormal checksum status, and if the gaming machine status flag is 05H, the game is stopped. When the power is turned on, the game machine state flag is set to any flag value, and processing corresponding to the game machine state flag is performed.

(CPU initialization processing of main control board 300)
FIG. 20 is a first flowchart for explaining CPU initialization processing in the main control board 300 according to the 1-2 type reference example, and FIG. 21 is a CPU initialization processing in the main control board 300 according to the 1-2 type reference example. It is the 2nd flowchart explaining.

When power is supplied from the power board, a system reset occurs in the main CPU 300a, and the main CPU 300a performs the following CPU initialization processing (S100).

(Step S100-1)
When the power is turned on, the main CPU 300a reads a startup program from the main ROM 300b as an initial setting process, and performs setting processes necessary for executing various processes.

(Step S100-3)
The main CPU 300a sets the wait processing time in the timer counter.

(Step S100-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether a power-off warning signal is detected. A power interruption detection circuit is provided in the main control board 300, and a power interruption warning signal is output from the power interruption detection circuit when the power supply voltage drops below a predetermined value. If the power-off notice signal is detected, the process proceeds to step S100-3, and if the power-off notice signal is not detected, the process proceeds to step S100-7.

(Step S100-7)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the wait time set in step S100-3 has elapsed. As a result, when it is determined that the wait time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S100-9, and when it is determined that the wait time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S100-5.

(Step S100-9)
The main CPU 300a executes necessary processing to permit access to the main RAM 300c.

(Step S100-11)
The main CPU 300a loads the flag value of the gaming machine state flag before power-off to the D register.

(Step S100-13)
The main CPU 300a calculates the checksum and determines whether the calculated checksum matches (is normal) the checksum saved when the power was turned off, and whether the backup flag is normal. As a result, if it is determined that the backup flag and checksum are normal, the process moves to step S100-15, and if either or both are determined to be abnormal, the process moves to step S100-25. .

(Step S100-15)
The main CPU 300a sets an address that does not include the setting value and the gaming machine status flag as the top address to be cleared in the main RAM 300c.

(Step S100-17)
The main CPU 300a determines whether a RAM clear operation signal has been input from the RAM clear switch 182s (whether the RAM clear button has been pressed). As a result, if it is determined that the RAM clear operation signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S100-31, and if it is determined that the RAM clear operation signal has not been input, the process proceeds to step S100-19. .

(Step S100-19)
The main CPU 300a checks whether the value of the gaming machine status flag loaded in step S100-11 is 00H (game ready status), whether the setting change switch 180s is on, and whether the middle frame 104 is open. judge. As a result, when it is determined that all three conditions are satisfied, the process moves to step S100-21, and when it is determined that even one of the three conditions is not satisfied, the process moves to step S100-23.

(Step S100-21)
The main CPU 300a sets the gaming machine state flag to 02H (setting confirmation state). That is, when the power is normally turned on in a state in which the middle frame 104 is open, the setting change switch 180s is on, and the RAM clear button is not pressed, the setting confirmation state is entered.

(Step S100-23)
The main CPU 300a executes an initialization process of clearing the area to be cleared at the time of power return, which is the area after the top address set in step S100-15 in the main RAM 300c, and shifts the process to step S100-49.

(Step S100-25)
The main CPU 300a sets 05H (checksum abnormal state) in the D register.

(Step S100-27)
The main CPU 300a performs out-of-area read/write check processing for checking and clearing the read/write memory in the out-of-use area.

(Step S100-29)
The main CPU 300a sets an address including a set value and a gaming machine state flag to the leading address to be cleared in the main RAM 300c.

(Step S100-31)
The main CPU 300a checks and clears the read/write memory of the used area.

(Step S100-33)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the check result of the read/write memory in step S100-31 is normal. As a result, if it is determined to be normal, the process moves to step S100-37, and if it is determined to be not normal, the process moves to step S100-35.

(Step S100-35)
The main CPU 300a sets 04H (RAM abnormal state) in the D register, and shifts the process to step S100-45.

(Step S100-37)
The main CPU 300a determines whether 02H (setting confirmation state) is set in the D register. As a result, when it is determined that 02H is set, the process moves to step S100-39, and when it is determined that 02H is not set, the process moves to step S100-41.

(Step S100-39)
The main CPU 300a sets 00H (game ready state) in the D register.

(Step S100-41)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the setting change condition is satisfied. As a result, when it is determined that the setting change condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S100-43, and when it is determined that the setting change condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S100-45. Here, at least the setting change conditions include that the setting change switch 180s is turned on, that the middle frame 104 is open, and that the RAM clear operation signal is input from the RAM clear switch 182s. included.

(Step S100-43)
The main CPU 300a sets 01H (setting change state) in the D register.

(Step S100-45)
The main CPU 300a saves the value set in the D register in the gaming machine state flag.

(Step S100-47)
The main CPU 300a executes an initialization process of clearing the clear target of the main RAM 300c when clearing the RAM, and shifts the process to step S100-49.

(Step S100-49)
The main CPU 300a performs a process of transmitting a payout command (RAM clear designation command) for transmitting to the payout control board 310 that the main RAM 300c has been cleared (stores the RAM clear designation command in a transmission buffer).

(Step S100-51)
The main CPU 300a loads the gaming machine state flag.

(Step S100-53)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the gaming machine state flag loaded in step S100-51 is 00H (playable state). As a result, if it is determined to be 00H, the process moves to step S110, and if it is determined not to be 00H, the process moves to step S100-55.

(Step S110)
The main CPU 300a performs subcommand group set processing. This subcommand group set process will be described later.

(Step S100-55)
The main CPU 300 a performs sub-command set processing for transmitting a predetermined command to the sub-control board 330 .

(Step S100-57)
The main CPU 300a sets the cycle of the timer interrupt.

(Step S100-59)
The main CPU 300a performs processing for prohibiting interrupts.

(Step S100-61)
The main CPU 300a updates the initial value update random number for the winning symbol random number. The initial value update random number for the winning symbol random number is for determining the initial value and the end value of the winning symbol random number. In other words, when the winning design random number is updated from the winning design random number initial value update random number to the winning design random number initial value update random number -1, the winning design random number is at that time. It will be updated to the initial value update random number for the winning design random number.

(Step S100-63)
The main CPU 300a analyzes the received data (main command) received from the payout control board 310 and executes various processes according to the received data.

(Step S100-65)
The main CPU 300 a performs processing for transmitting the sub-commands stored in the transmission buffer to the sub-control board 330 .

(Step S100-67)
The main CPU 300a performs processing for permitting interrupts.

(Step S100-69)
The main CPU 300a updates the reach group determination random number, the reach mode determination random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number, and thereafter repeats the processing from step S100-59. In the following description, the reach group determination random number, the reach mode determination random number, and the variation pattern random number for determining the variable effect pattern are collectively referred to as variable effect random numbers.

FIG. 22 is a flowchart for explaining the subcommand group set process (S110) in the main control board 300 according to the one-kind-two reference example.

(Step S110-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the flag value of the gaming machine state flag.

(Step S110-3)
The main CPU 300 a performs sub-command set processing for transmitting a predetermined command to the sub-control board 330 .

(Step S110-5)
The main CPU 300a performs a model command setting process of setting a model command indicating model information of the gaming machine 100 in a transmission buffer.

(Step S110-7)
The main CPU 300a performs setting value designation command setting processing for setting a setting value designation command indicating a registered setting value in a transmission buffer.

(Step S110-9)
The main CPU 300a performs a special figure 1 reservation designation command setting process for setting a special figure 1 reservation designation command indicating the number of special 1 reservations in the transmission buffer.

(Step S110-11)
The main CPU 300a performs a special figure 2 reservation designation command setting process for setting a special figure 2 reservation designation command indicating the number of special 2 reservations in the transmission buffer.

(Step S110-13)
The main CPU 300a performs a number command setting process of setting a number command indicating the remaining number of times of the time saving game state in the transmission buffer.

(Step S110-15)
The main CPU 300a performs a variation pattern selection state designation command setting process for setting a variation pattern selection state designation command indicating a variation pattern selection state in a transmission buffer.

(Step S110-17)
The main CPU 300a performs a special figure phase specification command setting process for setting a special figure phase specification command indicating a special game management phase in a transmission buffer. Incidentally, the special game management phase will be described later.

(Step S110-19)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the special game management phase is waiting for a special symbol variation. As a result, when it is determined that it is in the special symbol variation waiting state, the processing is moved to step S110-21, and when it is determined that it is not in the special symbol variation waiting state, the subcommand group set processing is terminated.

(Step S110-21)
The main CPU 300a sets the customer waiting designation command in the transmission buffer, and terminates the subcommand group set process.

Next, interrupt processing in the main control board 300 will be described. Here, save processing (XINT interrupt processing) and timer interrupt processing at power failure will be described.

(Save processing when main control board 300 is powered off (XINT interrupt processing))
FIG. 23 is a flow chart for explaining the saving process (XINT interrupt process) at the time of power failure in the main control board 300 according to the first and second reference examples. The main CPU 300a monitors the power failure detection circuit, and when the power supply voltage drops below a predetermined value, it interrupts the CPU initialization process and executes the save process at power failure.

(Step S300-1)
When the power-off warning signal is input, the main CPU 300a saves the register.

(Step S300-3)
The main CPU 300a checks the power-off notice signal.

(Step S300-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether a power-off warning signal is detected. As a result, when it is determined that the power cut warning signal is detected, the process is moved to step S300-11, and when it is determined that the power cut warning signal is not detected, the process is moved to step S300-7. .

(Step S300-7)
The main CPU 300a restores the register.

(Step S300-9)
The main CPU 300a performs processing for permitting an interrupt, and terminates the power-off save processing.

(Step S300-11)
The main CPU 300a executes output port clear processing to stop output from the output port.

(Step S300-13)
The main CPU 300a executes checksum setting processing for calculating and storing a checksum.

(Step S300-15)
The main CPU 300a executes RAM protection setting processing necessary to prohibit access to the main RAM 300c.

(Step S300-17)
The main CPU 300a sets the counter value of the loop counter to the predetermined number of power failure detection signal detections in order to set the power failure occurrence monitoring time.

(Step S300-19)
The main CPU 300a checks the power-off notice signal.

(Step S300-21)
The main CPU 300a determines whether a power-off warning signal is detected. As a result, when it is determined that the power cut warning signal is detected, the process is moved to step S300-17, and when it is determined that the power cut warning signal is not detected, the process is moved to step S300-23. .

(Step S300-23)
The main CPU 300a subtracts 1 from the value of the loop counter set in step S300-17.

(Step S300-25)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the counter value of the loop counter is zero. As a result, if it is determined that the counter value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S300-19, and if it is determined that the counter value is 0, the above-described CPU initialization process (step S100) is performed.

It should be noted that when the power is actually cut off, the operation of the game machine 100 is stopped while the steps S300-17 to S300-25 are being looped.

(Timer interrupt processing of main control board 300)
FIG. 24 is a flow chart for explaining timer interrupt processing in the main control board 300 according to the one-kind-two reference example. The main control board 300 is provided with a reset clock pulse generating circuit that generates a clock pulse every predetermined period (4 milliseconds in the first and second reference examples, hereinafter referred to as "4 ms"). Then, when a clock pulse is generated by the reset clock pulse generation circuit, the CPU initialization process (step S100) is interrupted, and the following timer interrupt process is executed.

(Step S400-1)
The main CPU 300a saves the register.

(Step S400-3)
The main CPU 300a performs processing for permitting interrupts.

(Step S400-5)
The main CPU 300a outputs the common data set in the common output buffer to the output port, the first special symbol indicator 160, the second special symbol indicator 162, the first special symbol reserve indicator 164, the second special symbol reserve. A dynamic port output process for controlling lighting of the display 166, the normal symbol display 168, the normal symbol reservation display 170, the right-handed information display 172, and the performance display monitor 184 is executed.

(Step S400-7)
The main CPU 300a reads various types of input port information and executes port input processing for accurately acquiring the latest switch state.

(Step S400-9)
The main CPU 300a loads the flag value of the gaming machine state flag.

(Step S400-11)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the flag value loaded in step S400-9 is 00H (playable state). As a result, when it is determined to be 00H, the process moves to step S400-15, and when it is determined not to be 00H, the process moves to step S400-13.

(Step S400-13)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the flag value loaded in step S400-9 is 03H (set abnormal state) or higher. As a result, if it is determined that it is 03H or more, the process moves to step S400-27, and if it is determined that it is not 03H or more, the process moves to step S450.

(Step S450)
The main CPU 300a executes setting-related processing, and shifts the processing to step S400-27. Note that the setting-related processing will be described later.

(Step S400-15)
The main CPU 300a performs timer update processing for updating various timer counters. Here, the various timer counters are decremented each time the timer interrupt processing of the main control board 300 is executed, and the decrementation is stopped when it reaches 0, unless otherwise specified.

(Step S400-17)
The main CPU 300a executes the process of updating the initial value update random number for the winning symbol random number in the same manner as in step S100-61.

(Step S400-19)
The main CPU 300a performs a process of updating the winning symbol random number. Specifically, the random number counter is updated by adding 1, and if the result of the addition exceeds the maximum value of the random number range, the random number counter is reset to 0. The random number is updated from the value of the initial value update random number for the winning design random number.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the one-two reference example, the jackpot determined random number and the winning determined random number are hardware random numbers updated by a hardware random number generator built in the main control board 300. The hardware random number generator updates both the jackpot determined random numbers and the winning determined random numbers according to a fixed rule, automatically changes the random number sequence each time the random number sequence completes a cycle, and resets the start value each time the system is reset. are changing.

(Step S500)
The main CPU 300a has a first start opening detection switch 120s, a second start opening detection switch 122s, a gate detection switch 124s, a first big winning opening detection switch 126s, a second big winning opening detection switch 128s, a specific area detection switch 140s, an out A switch management process is executed to determine whether or not a signal has been input from the ball detection switch 130s. The details of this switch management processing will be described later.

(Step S600)
The main CPU 300a executes a special game management process for controlling the progress of the special game. The details of this special game management process will be described later.

(Step S700)
The main CPU 300a executes normal game management processing for controlling the progress of the normal game. The details of this normal game management process will be described later.

(Step S400-21)
The main CPU 300a executes error management processing for determining various errors and making settings according to the error determination results.

(Step S400-23)
The main CPU 300a checks the general winning opening detection switch 118s, the first starting opening detection switch 120s, the second starting opening detection switch 122s, the first big winning opening detection switch 126s, and the second big winning opening detection switch 128s. Execute winning opening switch processing for adding a counter or the like for controlling winning balls.

(Step S400-25)
The main CPU 300a executes a payout control management process for creating and transmitting a payout command based on the counter value of the prize ball control counter set in step S400-23.

(Step S400-27)
The main CPU 300a executes external information management processing for setting output data for external information to be output from the game information output terminal board 312 to the outside.

(Step S400-29)
The main CPU 300a has a first special symbol display 160, a second special symbol display 162, a first special symbol reservation display 164, a second special symbol reservation display 166, a normal symbol display 168, and a normal symbol reservation display 170. , LED display setting processing for setting display data for controlling the lighting of various indicators (LEDs) such as the right-handed information indicator 172 to the output buffer corresponding to each common.

(Step S400-31)
The main CPU 300a synthesizes the solenoid output images of the normal electric accessory solenoid 122c, the first big prize opening solenoid 126c, the second big prize opening solenoid 128c and the movable member driving solenoid 142c, and outputs the solenoid output for storing in the output port buffer. Execute image composition processing.

(Step S400-33)
The main CPU 300a executes port output processing for outputting the common output buffer value stored in each output port buffer to the output port.

(Step S400-35)
The main CPU 300a performs processing for prohibiting interrupts.

(Step S400-37)
The main CPU 300a uses the non-use area of the main RAM 300c to perform processing for calculating the base ratio to be displayed on the performance display monitor 184, and common data for displaying the calculated base ratio on the performance display monitor 184. Executes performance display monitor control processing to be set in the output buffer. Note that in the performance display monitor control process, the base ratio is calculated for each predetermined period. Here, the performance display monitor 184 may alternately display the base ratio for the current period and the base ratio for the previous period at predetermined time intervals. Also, the base ratio displayed on the performance display monitor 184 may be switched according to a predetermined operation.

(Step S400-39)
The main CPU 300a restores the register and terminates the timer interrupt processing.

FIG. 25 is a flowchart for explaining the setting-related processing (S450) according to the one-kind-two reference example.

(Step S450-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the flag value of the gaming machine state flag is 01H (setting change state). As a result, if it is determined to be 01H, the process moves to step S450-3, and if it is determined not to be 01H, the process moves to step S450-15.

(Step S450-3)
The main CPU 300a loads the registered set values stored in the set value buffer into a predetermined processing area.

(Step S450-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the RAM clear switch 182s has been pressed (whether a RAM clear operation signal has been input). As a result, when it is determined that the RAM clear switch 182s has been pressed, the process proceeds to step S450-7, and when it is determined that the RAM clear switch 182s has not been pressed, the process proceeds to step S450-9. .

(Step S450-7)
The main CPU 300a adds 1 to the set value of the processing area.

(Step S450-9)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the set value of the processing area is in the range of 1-6. As a result, when it is determined that the set value is within the range of 1 to 6, the process proceeds to step S450-13, and when it is determined that the set value is not within the range of 1 to 6, the process proceeds to step S450-11. to move.

(Step S450-11)
The main CPU 300a sets the set value of the processing area to one.

(Step S450-13)
The main CPU 300a sets the set value of the processing area in the set value buffer.

(Step S450-15)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the setting change switch 180s is turned on. As a result, if it is determined that the setting change switch 180s is turned on, the setting-related processing is terminated, and if it is determined that the setting change switch 180s is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S450-17.

(Step S450-17)
The main CPU 300a sets a setting-related end designation command indicating the end of the setting-related processing in the transmission buffer.

(Step S110)
The main CPU 300a executes the subcommand group set process of FIG. That is, if the setting related process is executed, at the end, model command, setting value designation command, special figure 1 reserve designation command, special figure 2 reserve designation command, number of times command, variation pattern selection state designation command, special figure phase A designation command and a customer waiting designation command are transmitted to the sub control board 330 .

(Step S450-19)
The main CPU 300a sets the gaming machine state flag to 00H (game ready state), and terminates the setting-related processing.

As described above, according to the first and second reference examples, when the power is normally turned on with the middle frame 104 opened, the setting change switch 180s turned on, and the RAM clear button depressed, the CPU In the initialization process (FIG. 20), 01H (setting change state) is set to the gaming machine state flag. After that, timer interrupt processing is executed, but since 01H (setting change state) is set in the gaming machine state flag, all processing related to the progress of the game (steps S400-15 to S400-25 in FIG. 24) ) is stopped and configuration related processing is executed.

The setting-related processing is repeatedly executed while the setting change switch 180s is on, and during this setting-related processing, the operation of pressing the RAM clear button is accepted as the setting change operation of the registered set value. That is, during the setting change process (S450-1 to S450-13) for accepting the setting change operation, the registered setting value stored in the setting value buffer is one of the setting values provided in a plurality of stages according to the setting change operation. can be switched to

When the setting change switch 180s is turned off while the gaming machine state flag is set to 01H (setting change state), the setting change processing is terminated and the gaming machine state flag is set to 00H (playable state). set. As a result, from the next timer interrupt process, the process relating to the progress of the game can be executed.

Here, in the setting related processing according to the type 1 and 2 reference example, after the operation of pressing the RAM clear button, that is, after the reception of the setting change operation of the registered setting value is completed, the setting corresponding to the registered setting value is performed in the subcommand group set processing. A value designation command is transmitted to the sub control board 330 . On the other hand, no setting value designation command is transmitted to the sub control board 330 while the setting change operation is being accepted. In this way, the setting value designation command is not transmitted while the setting change operation is being accepted, and the setting value designation command is transmitted when the acceptance of the setting change operation is completed and the state shifts to a state in which the game can be progressed. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the risk of unauthorized acquisition of registered setting values.

Also, in the 1-2 type reference example, a plurality of flag values including at least 01H (setting change state) are switched. Then, when 01H (setting change state) is set in the gaming machine state flag, the setting-related processing can be executed and the progress of the game is stopped. In this way, since the setting-related processing is not executed while the game is in progress, the setting value designation command is not transmitted while the game is in progress, and the risk of illegally acquiring the registered setting values is reduced. be done.

Next, the switch management process of step S500, the special game management process of step S600, and the normal game management process of step S700 among the timer interrupt processes described above will be described in detail.

FIG. 26 is a flow chart for explaining switch management processing (step S500) in the main control board 300 according to the one-kind-two reference example.

(Step S500-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the gate detection switch ON is detected, that is, whether the game ball passes through the gate 124 and the detection signal from the gate detection switch 124s is turned ON. As a result, when it is determined that the gate detection switch-on is detected, the process proceeds to step S510, and when it is determined that the gate detection switch-on is not detected, the process proceeds to step S500-3.

(Step S510)
The main CPU 300 a executes gate passage processing based on passage of the game ball through the gate 124 . The details of this gate passage processing will be described later.

(Step S500-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the first starting hole detection switch is turned on, that is, whether a game ball enters the first starting hole 120 and a detection signal is input from the first starting hole detection switch 120s. As a result, if it is determined that the first starting port detection switch is turned on, the process proceeds to step S520, and if it is determined that the first starting port detection switch is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S500-5. to move.

(Step S520)
The main CPU 300 a executes the first starting opening passing process based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 120 . The details of the first starting opening passage processing will be described later.

(Step S500-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the second starting hole detection switch is turned on, that is, whether a game ball enters the second starting hole 122 and a detection signal is input from the second starting hole detection switch 122s. As a result, when it is determined that the second starting port detection switch is turned on, the process proceeds to step S530, and when it is determined that the second starting port detection switch is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S500-7. to move.

(Step S530)
The main CPU 300 a executes the second starting hole passing process based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting hole 122 . The details of the second starting opening passage processing will be described later.

(Step S500-7)
When the main CPU 300a detects that the large winning opening detection switch is turned on, that is, when the game ball enters the first large winning opening 126 and the second large winning opening 128, the first large winning opening detection switch 126s and the second large winning opening detection switch 126s It is determined whether or not a detection signal is input from the big winning opening detection switch 128s. As a result, when it is determined that the large winning opening detection switch is turned on, the process proceeds to step S500-9, and when it is determined that the large winning opening detection switch is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S500-11. transfer processing.

(Step S500-9)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not a big winning game is currently being played or a small winning game is being played, and the game ball has been properly entered into the first big winning hole 126 and the second big winning hole 128. Determine if there is Here, when it is determined that it is not during the big win game or the small winning game, it executes a predetermined fraud detection process, it is during the big win game or the small winning game, the first big winning port 126 and the second big winning port 126 When it is determined that the game ball has been properly entered into the winning opening 128, 1 is added to the large winning opening winning ball number counter, and a large winning opening winning designation command is set in the transmission buffer.

(Step S500-11)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the specific area detection switch ON is detected, that is, whether a game ball enters the specific area 140b and a detection signal is input from the specific area detection switch 140s. As a result, if it is determined that the specific area detection switch is turned on, the process moves to step S540, and if it is determined that the specific area detection switch is not turned on, the process moves to step S500-13.

(Step S540)
The main CPU 300a executes the specific area passing process based on the entry of the game ball into the specific area 140b, and ends the switch management process. Details of the specific area passage processing will be described later.

(Step S500-13)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the general winning hole detection switch is turned on, ie, whether a game ball enters the general winning hole 118 and a detection signal is input from the general winning hole detection switch 118s. As a result, when it is determined that the normal winning hole detection switch is turned on, the process proceeds to step S500-15, and when it is determined that the normal winning hole detection switch is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S500-17. to move.

(Step S500-15)
The main CPU 300a sets the general winning opening winning designation command in the transmission buffer.

(Step S500-17)
The main CPU 300a determines whether it is detected that the out-ball detection switch is turned on, that is, whether a detection signal is input from the out-ball detection switch 130s. As a result, if it is determined that the out-ball detection switch is turned on, the process proceeds to step S500-19, and if it is determined that the out-ball detection switch is not turned on, the switch management process is terminated. .

(Step S500-19)
The main CPU 300a sets the out-ball detection designation command in the transmission buffer, and terminates the switch management process.

FIG. 27 is a flowchart for explaining the gate passing process (step S510) in the main control board 300 according to the one-kind-two reference example.

(Step S510-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the winning determination random number updated by the hardware random number generator.

(Step S510-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter is greater than or equal to the maximum value, that is, whether the counter value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter is 4 or more. As a result, when it is determined that the counter value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter is equal to or higher than the maximum value, the gate passing process is terminated, and when it is determined that the normal symbol reserved ball number counter is not equal to or higher than the maximum value. The process moves to step S510-5.

(Step S510-5)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter to a value obtained by adding "1" to the current counter value.

(Step S510-7)
The main CPU 300a calculates a target storage unit for saving the acquired winning determination random number, among the four storage units of the normal-pattern reservation storage area.

(Step S510-9)
The main CPU 300a saves the winning determination random number obtained in step S510-1 in the target storage section calculated in step S510-7.

(Step S510-11)
The main CPU 300a sets a general pattern reservation specification command indicating the general pattern reservation number stored in the general pattern reservation storage area in the transmission buffer, and ends the gate passage processing.

FIG. 28 is a flowchart for explaining the first starting opening passage processing (step S520) in the main control board 300 according to the one-kind-two reference example.

(Step S520-1)
The main CPU 300a sets "00H" as the special symbol identification value. In addition, the special symbol identification value is for identifying whether the reservation type is special 1 reservation or special 2 reservation, special symbol identification value (00H) indicates special 1 reservation, special symbol identification value ( 01H) indicates special 2 reservation.

(Step S520-3)
The main CPU 300a sets the address of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter.

(Step S535)
The main CPU 300a executes the special symbol random number acquisition process, and ends the first starting opening passage process. It should be noted that this special symbol random number acquisition process is executed using a module common to the second start opening passage process (step S530). Therefore, the details of the special symbol random number acquisition process will be described after the description of the second start opening passage process.

FIG. 29 is a flow chart for explaining the second starting opening passing process (step S530) in the main control board 300 according to the one-kind-two reference example.

(Step S530-1)
The main CPU 300a sets "01H" as the special symbol identification value.

(Step S530-3)
The main CPU 300a sets the address of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter.

(Step S535)
The main CPU 300a executes special symbol random number acquisition processing, which will be described later.

(Step S530-5)
The main CPU 300a loads the normal game management phase. Although the details will be described later, the ordinary game management phase indicates the stage of ordinary game execution processing, that is, the progress of the ordinary game, and is updated according to the ordinary game execution processing stage.

(Step S530-7)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the normal game management phase loaded in step S530-5 is "04H". Incidentally, "04H" in the normal game management phase indicates that the normal electric accessory winning opening control process is in progress. In this ordinary electric accessory winning opening control process, since the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 122c is energized and the movable piece 122b is controlled to be in an open state, the second start opening 122 can be properly opened. It determines whether the state is As a result, when it is determined that the normal game management phase is not "04H", the second start opening passage processing is terminated, and when it is determined that the normal game management phase is "04H", step S530-9. to process.

(Step S530-9)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the normal electric accessory winning ball number counter to a value obtained by adding "1" to the current counter value, and ends the second start opening passage processing.

FIG. 30 is a flowchart for explaining the special symbol random number acquisition process (step S535) in the main control board 300 according to the one-two reference example. This special symbol random number acquisition process is executed using a common module in the above-described first starting opening passing process (step S520) and second starting opening passing process (step S530).

(Step S535-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the special symbol identification value set in step S520-1 or step S530-1.

(Step S535-3)
The main CPU 300a loads the number of target special symbol reserved balls. Here, if the special symbol identification value loaded in step S535-1 is "00H", the counter value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter, that is, the special 1 reserved number is loaded. Also, if the special symbol identification value loaded in step S535-1 is "01H", the counter value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter, that is, the special 2 reserved number is loaded.

(Step S535-5)
The main CPU 300a loads the jackpot determination random number updated by the hardware random number generator.

(Step S535-7)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the number of target special symbol reserved balls loaded in step S535-3 is equal to or greater than the upper limit. As a result, if it is determined that it is equal to or higher than the upper limit, the process moves to step S535-23, and if it is determined that it is not equal to or greater than the upper limit, the process moves to step S535-9.

(Step S535-9)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the target special symbol reserved ball number counter to a value obtained by adding "1" to the current counter value.

(Step S535-11)
The main CPU 300a calculates a target storage section for saving the acquired jackpot determination random number, among the eight storage sections of the special figure reservation storage area.

(Step S535-13)
The main CPU 300a loads the jackpot determination random number loaded in step S535-5, the winning pattern random number updated in step S400-19, the reach group determination random number updated in step S100-69, the reach mode determination random number, and the variation pattern. A random number is obtained and stored in the target storage unit calculated in step S535-11.

(Step S535-15)
The main CPU 300a performs a special symbol reserved ball winning order setting process for updating and storing the winning order of special 1 reservation and special 2 reservation stored in the special symbol reservation storage area.

(Step S536)
The main CPU 300a executes the effect determination process at the time of acquisition based on various random numbers stored in the target storage unit in step S535-13. In this performance determination process at the time of acquisition, the result of the big role lottery brought about by the newly stored special 1 suspension or special 2 suspension and the information related to the execution mode of the variable performance are stored in the special 1 suspension or special 2 suspension. Judge at the time. The details of the effect determination process at the time of acquisition will be described later.

(Step S535-19)
The main CPU 300a loads the counter values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter.

(Step S535-21)
The main CPU 300a sets the special figure reserve specification command in the transmission buffer based on the counter value loaded in step S535-19. Here, based on the counter value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter (special 1 reserved number), the special figure 1 reserved designation command is set, and based on the counter value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter (special 2 reserved number) to set the special figure 2 hold designation command. As a result, the number of special 1 reservations and the number of special 2 reservations are transmitted to the sub control board 330 each time special 1 reservations or special 2 reservations are stored.

(Step S535-23)
The main CPU 300a loads the normal game management phase.

(Step S535-25)
The main CPU 300a checks the normal game management phase loaded in step S535-23, and determines whether the state is less than the normal electric accessory winning opening control state described later. As a result, if it is determined that it is less than the normal electric accessory winning opening control state, the process is moved to step S535-27, and if it is determined that it is not less than the normal electric accessory winning opening control state, the special End the pattern random number acquisition process.

(Step S535-27)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not there has been an abnormal winning, and when it is determined that there has been an abnormal winning, performs a starting opening abnormal winning error process for performing a predetermined process, and executes the special symbol random number acquisition processing (step S535). ).

FIG. 31 is a flowchart for explaining the effect determination process (step S536) at the time of acquisition in the main control board 300 according to the one-two reference example.

(Step S536-1)
The main CPU 300a selects a corresponding jackpot determination random number determination table based on the set value being set. Specifically, if the stored hold is special 1 hold, the corresponding special 1 jackpot determination random number determination table (see FIGS. 6(a) to 6(f)) based on the set value being set Choose one. Also, if the stored hold is special 2 hold, one of the corresponding special 2 jackpot determination random number determination tables (see FIGS. 7(a) to 7(f)) based on the set value being set to select. Then, based on the selected table and the big hit determination random number stored in the target storage unit in step S535-13, a special symbol winning temporary determination process for temporarily determining any one of big win, small win, and loss is performed.

(Step S536-3)
The main CPU 300a executes a special symbol temporary determination process for temporarily determining a special symbol. Here, if the result of the temporary major role lottery in step S536-1 (the result derived by the special symbol per temporary determination process) is a big hit or a small hit, it is stored in the target storage unit in step S535-13. The winning symbol random number, the winning type (whether it is a big win or a small win), and the reserved type are loaded, and the corresponding winning symbol random number determination table (see FIG. 8) is selected to extract and extract the special symbol determination data. Save the special design determination data (big hit design or small hit design type). In addition, when the result of the provisional key role lottery in step S536-1 is a loss, predetermined special symbol determination data for loss (type of losing symbol) is saved.

(Step S536-5)
The main CPU 300a sets a look-ahead symbol type specification command (a look-ahead specification command) corresponding to the special symbol determination data saved in step S536-3 in the transmission buffer.

(Step S536-7)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the result derived by the special symbol winning temporary determination process in step S536-1 is a big win or a small win. As a result, when it is determined that it is a big hit or a small hit, the process moves to step S536-9, and when it is determined that it is not a big hit or a small win (it is a loss), the process moves to step S536-11.

(Step S536-9)
The main CPU 300a sets the reach mode determination random number determination table (see FIGS. 10(b) and (c)) or the reach mode determination random number determination table (see FIGS. 10(d) and (e)) at the time of the small hit, and step The process moves to S536-19.

(Step S536-11)
The main CPU 300a loads the reach group determination random number stored in the target storage unit in step S535-13.

(Step S536-13)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the reach group determination random number loaded in step S536-11 is a fixed value (8500 or more). Here, the group type is determined by referring to the reach group determination random number determination table, and this reach group determination random number determination table is selected according to the stored number of reservations. At this time, the reach group determination random number is obtained from the range of 0 to 10006, and if the value of the reach group determination random number is 8500 or more, the same reach group determination random number determination table is selected regardless of the number of reservations, and the reach If the value of the group determination random number is less than 8500, different reach group determination random number determination tables are selected according to the number of reservations. In the following, among the reach group determination random numbers, the value in the range of 0 to 8499 in which different reach group determination random number determination tables are selected according to the number of reservations is set to an indefinite value, and the same reach group determination random number determination is performed regardless of the number of reservations. A value in the range of 8500 to 10006 from which the table is selected is called a fixed value. If it is determined that the reach group determination random number loaded in step S536-11 is a fixed value (8500 or more), the process moves to step S536-15, and the reach group determination random number loaded in step S536-11 is fixed. If it is determined not to be the value (8500 or more), the process moves to step S536-27.

(Step S536-15)
The main CPU 300a sets a reach group determination random number determination table (see FIG. 9). Although a plurality of reach group determination random number determination tables are provided according to the number of reservations, here, the table used when the number of reservations is 0 is selected. Then, the reach group (group type) is tentatively determined based on the set reach group determination random number determination table and the reach group determination random number stored in the target storage unit in step S535-13.

(Step S536-17)
The main CPU 300a sets the losing reach mode determination random number determination table (see FIG. 10A) corresponding to the group type tentatively determined in step S536-15, and shifts the process to step S536-19.

(Step S536-19)
The main CPU 300a determines the variation mode number based on the reach mode determination random number determination table set in step S536-9 or step S536-17 and the reach mode determination random number stored in the target storage unit in step S535-13. provisionally determined. Further, here, along with the variation mode number, a variation pattern random number determination table is tentatively determined.

(Step S536-21)
The main CPU 300a sets, in the transmission buffer, the prefetch designation variation mode command (prefetch designation command) corresponding to the variation mode number tentatively determined in step S536-19.

(Step S536-23)
The main CPU 300a temporarily determines the variation pattern number based on the variation pattern random number determination table provisionally determined in step S536-19 and the variation pattern random number stored in the target storage unit in step S535-13.

(Step S536-25)
The main CPU 300a sets the look-ahead specified variation pattern command (pre-read specification command) corresponding to the variation pattern number tentatively determined in step S536-23 in the transmission buffer, and ends the effect determination process at the time of acquisition.

(Step S536-27)
The main CPU 300a, regarding the suspension newly stored in the target storage unit, according to the number of suspensions when the suspension is read out, changes the group type, that is, the variable effect pattern (undefined value command (prefetch Specified variation mode command and look-ahead specified variation pattern command = 7FH) is set in the transmission buffer, and the effect determination process at the time of acquisition is terminated.

FIG. 32 is a flowchart for explaining the specific area passage processing in step S540 according to the one-two reference example.

(Step S540-1)
When the main CPU 300a determines in step S500-11 that the specific area detection switch is turned on, the main CPU 300a determines whether or not the effective period flag is turned on. As a result, if it is determined that the validity period flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S540-3, and if it is determined that the validity period flag is not ON, the process proceeds to step S540-9.

Although the details will be described later, this validity period flag is for determining whether or not the entry of the game ball into the specific area 140b is considered valid. It is turned on at the start of a winning game (first round game).

(Step S540-3)
If it is determined in step S540-1 that the validity period flag is ON, the main CPU 300a determines whether the specific area entry flag is ON. The specific area entry flag identifies that the game ball has already effectively entered the specific area 140b. If it is determined that the specific area entry flag is on, the specific area passing process is terminated, and if it is determined that the specific area entry flag is not on, the process proceeds to step S540-5.

(Step S540-5)
The main CPU 300a turns on the specific area entry flag.

(Step S540-7)
The main CPU 300a sets a specific area entry command in the transmission buffer in order to notify the sub-control board 330 that the game ball has effectively entered the specific area 140b, and terminates the specific area passing process.

(Step S540-9)
The main CPU 300a executes predetermined error processing.

(Step S540-11)
The main CPU 300a sets an error command indicating that an error has been detected in the transmission buffer, and terminates the specific area passing process.

FIG. 33 is a diagram for explaining the special game management phase according to the 1-2 type reference example. As already explained, in the first and second reference examples, the special game triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 120 or the second start port 122 and the passage of the game ball into the gate 124 are triggered A normal game progresses in parallel. The special game-related processing is executed step by step and repeatedly, and the main control board 300 manages each of these special game-related processing in a special game management phase.

As shown in FIG. 33, the main ROM 300b stores a plurality of special game control modules for controlling the execution of a special game, and each special game control module is associated with a special game management phase. . Specifically, when the special game management phase is "00H", a module for executing the "special symbol variation waiting process" is called, and when the special game management phase is "01H", A module for executing a "special symbol fluctuating process" is called, and when the special game management phase is "02H", a module for executing a "special symbol stop symbol display process" is called and a special symbol is displayed. When the game management phases are "03H" and "07H", a module for executing "pre-processing for opening the big winning opening" is called, and when the special game management phases are "04H" and "08H". , a module for executing the "large winning opening opening control process" is called, and when the special game management phase is "05H" or "09H", the "large winning opening closing effective process" is executed. is called, and if the special game management phase is "06H" or "0AH", a module is called for executing the "big winning opening end wait process".

FIG. 34 is a flowchart for explaining the special game management process (step S600) in the main control board 300 according to the 1-2 type reference example.

(Step S600-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the special game management phase.

(Step S600-3)
The main CPU 300a selects the special game control module corresponding to the special game management phase loaded in step S600-1.

(Step S600-5)
The main CPU 300a calls the special game control module selected in step S600-3 and starts processing.

(Step S600-7)
The main CPU 300a loads a special game timer that manages the special game control time, and ends the special game management process.

FIG. 35 is a flowchart for explaining the special symbol variation waiting process in the main control board 300 according to the one-two reference example. This special symbol variation waiting process is executed when the special game management phase is "00H".

(Step S610-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter, that is, the number of special 2 reserved balls (X2) is "1" or more. As a result, if it is determined that the number of special 2 reservations (X2) is "1" or more, the process is moved to step S610-7, and if it is determined that the number of special 2 reservations (X2) is not "1" or more to step S610-3.

(Step S610-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter, that is, the number of special 1 reserved balls (X1) is "1" or more. As a result, if it is determined that the number of special 1 reservations (X1) is "1" or more, the process is moved to step S610-7, and if it is determined that the number of special 1 reservations (X1) is not "1" or more to step S610-5.

(Step S610-5)
The main CPU 300a sets a customer waiting command in the transmission buffer, executes customer waiting setting processing for setting the customer waiting state, and ends the special symbol variation waiting processing.

(Step S610-7)
The main CPU 300a stores the special 2 reserve stored in the first to fourth storage units of the second special figure reservation storage area, or the first to fourth storage units of the first special figure reservation storage area. The stored special 1 pending is block-transferred to a storage unit with a lower ordinal by one. Specifically, in the above step S610-1, if it is determined that the number of special symbol 2 reserved balls is "1" or more, the second storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the second special symbol reservation storage area The stored Special 2 hold is transferred to the first to third storage units. Further, the main RAM 300c is provided with a 0th storage unit to be processed, and the special 2 hold stored in the 1st storage unit is block-transferred to the 0th storage unit. Also, in the above step S610-3, when it is determined that the number of special symbol 1 reserved balls is "1" or more, it is stored in the second storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area The special 1 hold stored in the first storage unit is transferred to the first to third storage units, and the special 1 hold stored in the first storage unit is block-transferred to the 0th storage unit. In addition, in this special symbol storage area shift process, "1" is subtracted from the counter value of the target special symbol retention ball number counter corresponding to the retention type transferred to the 0th storage unit, and special 1 suspension or special 2 suspension sets a pending decrement designation command in the transmission buffer, indicating that the has decremented by "1".

(Step S611)
The main CPU 300a executes a special symbol hit determination process for performing a big winning lottery. This special symbol hitting determination processing will be described later.

(Step S610-11)
The main CPU 300a executes special symbol determination processing for determining special symbols. Here, if the determination information (lottery result of the big role lottery) stored in step S611 is a big win or a small win, the winning type (whether it is a big win or a small win) and the pending type are loaded and the corresponding Set the winning pattern random number determination table. Then, referring to the set winning symbol random number determination table, extracting special symbol determination data using the winning symbol random number transferred to the 0th storage unit, extracted special symbol determination data (type of big winning symbol or small winning symbol ). On the other hand, when the lottery result of the major role lottery stored in step S611 is a loss, if the reservation type is special 1 reservation, the special symbol X is saved as a losing design, and if the reservation type is special 2 reservation, Save the special symbol Y as a lost symbol. In addition, here, the symbol type designation command corresponding to the saved special symbol determination data is set in the transmission buffer.

(Step S610-13)
The main CPU 300a saves the special symbol stop symbol number corresponding to the special symbol determination data extracted in step S610-11. In addition, the first special symbol display 160 and the second special symbol display 162 are each composed of 7 segments, and each segment constituting the 7 segments is associated with a number (counter value). The special symbol stop symbol number determined here indicates the number (counter value) of the segment that is finally lit.

(Step S612)
The main CPU 300a executes a special symbol variation number determination process for determining a variation mode number and a variation pattern number. The details of this special symbol variation number determination process will be described later.

(Step S610-15)
The main CPU 300a loads the variation mode number and variation pattern number determined in step S612, and determines variation time 1 and variation time 2 with reference to the variation time determination table. Then, the total time of the determined variable times 1 and 2 is set in the special symbol variable timer.

(Step S610-17)
The main CPU 300a performs spare area setting processing, such as storing the game state when the big win lottery is executed in the game state buffer. In addition, in this spare area setting process, when the result of the big win lottery is a big win, the spare area of the main RAM 300c stores the game state information set after the big win game, the type of big win symbol (special symbol determination data), and the like. .

(Step S610-19)
The main CPU 300a executes a process of setting a special symbol display symbol counter in the first special symbol display device 160 or the second special symbol display device 162 in order to start variable display of special symbols. A counter value is associated with each segment of the 7 segments that constitute the first special symbol display device 160 and the second special symbol display device 162, and the segment corresponding to the counter value set in the special symbol display symbol counter is Lighting is controlled. Here, the counter value corresponding to the segment to be lit at the start of the variable display of the special symbols is set in the special symbol display symbol counter. As for the special symbol display symbol counter, a special symbol 1 display symbol counter corresponding to the first special symbol display device 160 and a special symbol 2 display symbol counter corresponding to the second special symbol display device 162 are separately provided. Here, the counter value is set to the counter corresponding to the hold type.

(Step S610-21)
The main CPU 300a loads the counter values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter, and sets the special symbol reserved designation command in the transmission buffer. Here, based on the counter value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter (special 1 reserved number), the special figure 1 reserved designation command is set, and based on the counter value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter (special 2 reserved number) to set the special figure 2 hold designation command. Also, here, a special symbol winning prize order command corresponding to the winning order of special 1 reservation and special 2 reservation stored in step S610-7 is set in the transmission buffer. As a result, each time the Special 1 reserve or Special 2 reserve is completed, the number of Special 1 reserves, the number of Special 2 reserves, and the winning order of these reserves are transmitted to the sub control board 330 .

(Step S610-23)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to "01H" and terminates the special symbol variation waiting process.

FIG. 36 is a flow chart for explaining the above-mentioned special symbol hit determination process (S611) according to the one kind and two kind reference example.

(Step S611-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the registered setting values in the setting value buffer.

(Step S611-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the registered setting value loaded in step S611-1 is within the normal range. As a result, when it is determined that the value is within the normal range, the process proceeds to step S611-9, and when it is determined that the value is not within the normal range, the process proceeds to step S611-5.

(Step S611-5)
The main CPU 300a sets the gaming machine state flag to 03H (set abnormal state).

(Step S611-7)
The main CPU 300a sets the setting abnormal state command (subcommand) in the transmission buffer, and terminates the special symbol hit determination process. When this abnormal setting state command is transmitted to the sub control board 330, notification of the abnormal setting is made.

(Step S611-9)
The main CPU 300a refers to the big win determination random number determination table corresponding to the information loaded in step S611-1, and sets the lower limit value and the upper limit value when determining a big win or a small win.

(Step S611-11)
The main CPU 300a compares the jackpot determination random number transferred to the 0th storage unit with the above-described lower and upper limit values, and performs determination processing (big win lottery) to determine whether or not a jackpot or small win has been won.

(Step S611-13)
The main CPU 300a sets the result of the determination process in step S611-11 as determination information, and terminates the special symbol winning determination process.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart for explaining the special symbol variation number determination process in the main control board 300 according to the one-two reference example.

(Step S612-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the result of the big win lottery in step S611 is a big win or a small win. As a result, when it is determined that it is a big hit or a small hit, the process is moved to step S612-3, and when it is determined that it is neither a big hit nor a small hit (it is a loss), the process goes to step S612-5. Move.

(Step S612-3)
The main CPU 300a sets a ready-to-win mode determination random number determination table corresponding to the current gaming state, the type of jackpot symbol, the type of hold, and the variation state.

(Step S612-5)
The main CPU 300a confirms the counter value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter when the read reservation type is Special 2 reservation, and when the read reservation type is Special 1 reservation, Check the counter value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter.

(Step S612-7)
The main CPU 300a sets the corresponding reach group determination random number determination table based on the current gaming state, the number of pending games confirmed in step S612-5, and the type of pending game. Then, the reach group (group type) is determined based on the set reach group determination random number determination table and the reach group determination random number transferred to the 0th storage unit in step S610-7.

(Step S612-9)
The main CPU 300a sets the reach mode determination random number determination table at the time of losing corresponding to the group type determined in step S612-7.

(Step S612-11)
The main CPU 300a determines the variable mode based on the reach mode determination random number determination table set in step S612-3 or step S612-9 and the reach mode determination random number transferred to the 0th storage unit in step S610-7. Decide on a number. Also, here, along with the variation mode number, a variation pattern random number determination table is determined.

(Step S612-13)
The main CPU 300a sets the variable mode command corresponding to the variable mode number determined in step S612-11 in the transmission buffer.

(Step S612-15)
The main CPU 300a determines the variation pattern number based on the variation pattern random number determination table determined in step S612-11 and the variation pattern random number transferred to the 0th storage unit in step S610-7.

(Step S612-17)
The main CPU 300a sets the variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern number determined in step S612-15 in the transmission buffer, and terminates the special symbol variation number determination process.

FIG. 38 is a flow chart for explaining the special symbol changing process in the main control board 300 according to the one-two reference example. This special symbol changing process is executed when the special game management phase is "01H".

(Step S620-1)
The main CPU 300a executes processing for updating the special symbol variation base counter. In addition, the counter value of the special symbol variation base counter is set so as to make one round at a predetermined period (for example, 100 ms). Specifically, when the counter value of the special symbol variation base counter is "0", a predetermined counter value (for example, 25) is set, and when the counter value is "1" or more, Update the counter value to the value obtained by subtracting "1" from the current counter value.

(Step S620-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value of the special symbol variation base counter updated in step S620-1 is "0". As a result, if the counter value is "0", the process proceeds to step S620-5, and if the counter value is not "0", the process proceeds to step S620-9.

(Step S620-5)
The main CPU 300a performs a special symbol variation timer update process of subtracting a predetermined value from the timer value of the special symbol variation timer set in step S610-15.

(Step S620-7)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the special symbol variation timer updated in step S620-5 is "0". As a result, if the timer value is "0", the process proceeds to step S620-15, and if the timer value is not "0", the process proceeds to step S620-9.

(Step S620-9)
The main CPU 300a updates the special symbol display timer that counts the lighting time of each segment of the 7 segments that constitute the first special symbol display 160 and the second special symbol display 162. FIG. Specifically, when the timer value of the special symbol display timer is "0", a predetermined timer value is set, and when the timer value is "1" or more, from the current timer value Update the timer value to the value decremented by "1".

(Step S620-11)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the special symbol display timer is "0". As a result, when it is determined that the timer value of the special symbol display timer is "0", the processing is shifted to step S620-13, and when it is determined that the timer value of the special symbol display timer is not "0", the End the process during special symbol fluctuation.

(Step S620-13)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the special symbol display symbol counter to be updated, and ends the special symbol changing process. As a result, the segments that make up the 7 segments are sequentially lit at predetermined time intervals.

(Step S620-15)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to "02H".

(Step S620-17)
The main CPU 300a saves the special symbol stop symbol number (counter value) determined in step S610-13 in the target special symbol display symbol counter. As a result, the determined special symbol is stop-displayed on the first special symbol display 160 or the second special symbol display 162 .

(Step S620-19)
The main CPU 300a sets a special symbol stop designation command indicating that the special symbols are stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 160 or the second special symbol display device 162 in the transmission buffer.

(Step S620-21)
The main CPU 300a sets the special symbol variation stop time, which is the time during which the special symbols are stopped and displayed, in the special game timer, and terminates the special symbol variation process.

FIG. 39 is a flowchart for explaining a special symbol stop symbol display process in the main control board 300 according to the one-two reference example. This special symbol stop symbol display process is executed when the special game management phase is "02H".

(Step S630-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the special game timer set in step S620-21 is not "0". As a result, when it is determined that the timer value of the special game timer is not "0", the special symbol stop symbol display process is terminated, and when it is determined that the timer value of the special game timer is "0". The process moves to step S630-3.

(Step S630-3)
The main CPU 300a confirms the result of the big role lottery.

(Step S630-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the result of the big win lottery is a big win. As a result, when it is determined that it is a big hit, the process moves to step S630-19, and when it is determined that it is not a big win, the process moves to step S630-7.

(Step S630-7)
The main CPU 300a executes a number cutting management process. Here, a time-saving state flag for identifying whether the game state is a non-time-saving game state or a time-saving game state is loaded, and whether the current game state is a non-time-saving game state or a time-saving game state to confirm. Then, when the game state is the time-saving game state, the counter value of the time-saving cutting counter is updated to a value obtained by subtracting "1" from the current counter value. In addition, as a result of updating the time-saving cutting counter, when the counter value becomes "0", the time-saving state flag corresponding to the non-time-saving gaming state is set. As a result, in the time-saving game state, the game state shifts to the non-time-saving game state when the special symbols are determined a predetermined number of times without winning the jackpot.

(Step S630-9)
The main CPU 300a updates the variation state.

(Step S630-11)
The main CPU 300a sets, in the transmission buffer, a game state confirmation designation command at the time of special symbol determination, which indicates the game state when the special symbol is determined.

(Step S630-13)
The main CPU 300a sets, in the transmission buffer, a count command for transmitting the number of time reductions updated in step S630-7 to the sub control board 330. FIG.

(Step S630-15)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the result of the big win lottery is a small win. As a result, when it is determined that it is a small win, the process moves to step S630-21, and when it is determined that it is not a small win, the process moves to step S630-17.

(Step S630-17)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to "00H" and terminates the special symbol stop symbol display process. As a result, the special game management processing based on the 1 reserve is finished, and when the special 1 reserve or the special 2 reserve is stored, the processing for starting the variable display of the special symbols based on the next reserve is performed. will be

(Step S630-19)
The main CPU 300a resets (sets) the game state to the non-time-saving game state, which is the initial state.

(Step S630-21)
The main CPU 300a sets the data of the special electric accessary product operating ram set table according to the determined special symbol type.

(Step S630-23)
The main CPU 300a performs a process for setting the maximum number of operations of the special electric accessory. Specifically, referring to the data set in step S630-21, a predetermined number (counter value corresponding to the type of special symbol = number of rounds) is set as a counter value in the special electric accessory maximum operation counter. do. It should be noted that this special electric accessory maximum operation number cut counter indicates the number of rounds that can be executed in the big winning game to be started from now on. On the other hand, the main RAM 300c is provided with a special electric accessory continuous operation number cutting counter, and at the start of each round game, by adding "1" to the counter value of the special electric accessory continuous operation number cutting counter, The current round game number is managed. Here, a process of resetting (updating to "0") the counter value of the special electric role product continuous operation number cutting counter is executed together with the start of the big winning game.

(Step S630-25)
The main CPU 300a refers to the data set in step S630-21 and saves a predetermined opening time as a timer value in the special game timer.

(Step S630-27)
The main CPU 300a sets an opening designation command for transmitting the start of the big winning game or the small winning game to the sub control board 330 in the transmission buffer. This opening designation command is provided for each opening time, and here, the opening designation command corresponding to the opening time saved in step S630-25 is set in the transmission buffer.

(Step S630-29)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to "03H" if the result of the big win lottery confirmed in step S630-3 is a big win, and changes the special game management phase to "03H" if it is a small win. 07H", and terminates the special symbol stop symbol display process. As a result, a big winning game or a small winning game is started.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart for explaining the big winning opening pre-opening process in the main control board 300 according to the first and second reference examples. This big winning hole pre-opening process is executed when the special game management phase is "03H" or "07H".

(Step S640-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the timer value of the special game timer is "0". As a result, when it is determined that the timer value of the special game timer is not "0", the processing before opening the big winning opening is terminated, and when it is determined that the timer value of the special game timer is "0". The process moves to step S640-3.

(Step S640-3)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the special electric accessory continuous operation cut-off counter to a value obtained by adding "1" to the current counter value.

(Step S640-5)
The main CPU 300a sets, in the transmission buffer, a command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening 126 and the second large winning opening 128 to transmit to the sub control board 330 the opening of the first large winning opening 126 and the second large winning opening 128 (the start of the round game).

(Step S641)
The main CPU 300a executes the big winning opening opening/closing switching process. This special winning opening opening/closing switching process will be described later.

(Step S640-7)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the special game management phase is 07H, that is, whether the small winning game is in progress. As a result, when it is determined that the special game management phase is 07H, the process moves to step S640-9, and when it is determined that the special game management phase is not 07H, the process moves to step S640-13.

(Step S640-9)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not it is time to start the first round game based on the counter value of the special electric accessory continuous operation cut-off counter. As a result, when it is determined that it is time to start the first round game, the process is moved to step S640-11, and when it is determined that it is not the time to start the first round game, the process proceeds to step S640-13. Move.

(Step S640-11)
The main CPU 300a turns on the validity period flag. Thereby, entry of the game ball into the specific area 140b is validated with the start of the small winning game.

(Step S640-13)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to a value obtained by adding 01H to the current value ("04H" or "08H"), and terminates the pre-opening processing for the big winning opening.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart for explaining the big winning opening opening/closing switching process in the main control board 300 according to the one-two reference example.

(Step S641-1)
The main CPU 300a determines that the counter value of the special electric role product opening/closing switching frequency cutting counter is the number of special electric role product opening/closing switching times (the number of opening/closing times of the first big prize winning port 126 and the second big prize winning port 128 during one round game). is the upper limit of As a result, when it is determined that the counter value is the upper limit value, the big winning opening opening/closing switching process is terminated, and when it is determined that the counter value is not the upper limit value, the process is shifted to step S641-3.

(Step S641-3)
The main CPU 300a refers to the data of the special electric accessory operating ramset table, and based on the counter value of the special electric accessory open/close switching counter, turns the first big winning solenoid 126c or the second big winning solenoid 128c. Solenoid control data for energization control, and timer data that is the energization time or energization stop time of the first big winning opening solenoid 126c or the second big winning opening solenoid 128c are extracted.

(Step S641-5)
Based on the solenoid control data extracted in step S641-3, the main CPU 300a starts to energize the first big winning opening solenoid 126c or the second big winning opening solenoid 128c, or the first big winning opening solenoid 126c. Alternatively, a large winning opening solenoid energization control process for stopping the energization of the second large winning opening solenoid 128c is executed. By executing this big winning opening solenoid energization control process, in steps S400-31 and S400-33, the first big winning opening solenoid 126c or the second big winning opening solenoid 128c is controlled to start or stop energizing. It will happen.

(Step S641-7)
The main CPU 300a saves the timer value based on the timer data extracted in step S641-3 in the special game timer. It should be noted that the timer value saved in the special game timer here is the maximum opening time of the first big winning hole 126 and the second big winning hole 128 .

(Step S641-9)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the first big winning opening solenoid 126c or the second big winning opening solenoid 128c is energized, that is, in step S641-5, the first big winning opening solenoid 126c or the second big winning opening solenoid 128c is turned on. It is determined whether a control process for starting energization has been performed. As a result, when it is determined that it is in the energization start state, the process is moved to step S641-11, and when it is determined that it is not in the energization start state, the special winning opening opening/closing switching process is ended.

(Step S641-11)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the special electric accessory opening/closing switching number cutting counter to a value obtained by adding "1" to the current counter value, and ends the big winning opening opening/closing switching process.

FIG. 42 is a flow chart for explaining the big winning opening opening control process in the main control board 300 according to the first and second reference examples. This big winning hole opening control process is executed when the special game management phase is "04H" or "08H".

(Step S650-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the special game timer saved in step S641-7 is not "0". As a result, when it is determined that the timer value of the special game timer is not "0", the process is moved to step S650-5, and when it is determined that the timer value of the special game timer is "0", step S650. -3 is processed.

(Step S650-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the counter value of the special electric role product open/close switching number cutting counter is the upper limit value of the number of special electric role product opening/closing switching times. As a result, when it is determined that the counter value is the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S650-7, and when it is determined that the counter value is not the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S641.

(Step S641)
In the above step S650-3, if it is determined that the counter value of the special electric role product opening/closing switching number cutting counter is not the upper limit value of the number of special electric role product opening/closing switching times, the main CPU 300a executes the processing of step S641. Execute.

(Step S650-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value of the big winning hole winning ball number counter updated in step S500-9 has reached the specified number, that is, the first big winning hole 126 or the second big winning hole 128 It is determined whether or not the same number of game balls as the maximum number of winable prizes in one round have entered. As a result, when it is determined that the specified number has not been reached, the big winning opening opening control process is terminated, and when it is determined that the specified number has been reached, the process proceeds to step S650-7.

(Step S650-7)
The main CPU 300a stops the energization of the first and second major winning opening solenoids 126c and 128c to close the first and second major winning openings 126 and 128. to run. As a result, the first big winning opening 126 and the second big winning opening 128 are closed.

(Step S650-9)
The main CPU 300a saves the valid time (interval time) for closing the big winning opening in the special game timer.

(Step S650-11)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to a value obtained by adding 01H to the current value ("05H" or "09H").

(Step S650-13)
The main CPU 300a sets, in the transmission buffer, a large winning hole closing specification command indicating that the first big winning hole 126 and the second big winning hole 128 are closed, and ends the big winning hole opening control process.

FIG. 43 is a flow chart for explaining the big winning opening closing effective process in the main control board 300 according to the first and second reference examples. This big winning opening closing valid process is executed when the special game management phase is "05H" or "09H".

(Step S660-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the special game timer saved in step S650-9 is not "0". As a result, when it is determined that the timer value of the special game timer is not "0", the big winning opening closing effective process is terminated, and when it is determined that the timer value of the special game timer is "0". The process moves to step S660-3.

(Step S660-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value of the special electric role product continuous operation number cutting counter matches the counter value of the special electric role product maximum operation number cutting counter, that is, whether the preset number of round games has ended. judge. As a result, if it is determined that the counter value of the special electric accessory continuous operation number cutting counter matches the counter value of the special electric accessory maximum operation number cutting counter, the process is moved to step S660-9, and it is determined that they do not match If so, the process moves to step S660-5.

(Step S660-5)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to "03H". In addition, when the special game management phase is "09H", that is, during the control of the small winning game, the number of round games of the small winning game is "1", so it is always determined as YES in the above step S660-3. and the process does not move to that step.

(Step S660-7)
The main CPU 300a saves a predetermined large winning opening closing time in the special game timer, and ends the special winning opening closing effective process. As a result, the next round game is started.

(Step S660-9)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the special game management phase is 09H, that is, whether the small winning game is in progress. As a result, when it is determined that the special game management phase is 09H, the process moves to step S660-11, and when it is determined that the special game management phase is not 09H, the process moves to step S660-21.

(Step S660-11)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not all the game balls that entered the second big winning hole 128 have been discharged. Here, when the value obtained by subtracting the total number of game balls entering the specific area 140b and the non-specific area 140c from the number of game balls entering the second big winning hole 128 becomes 0, the ejection is completed. I judge. When it is determined that the ejection is completed, the process proceeds to step S660-13, and when it is determined that the ejection is not completed, the special winning opening closing effective process is terminated. If the determination result indicating that the ejection is not completed is continuously derived for a certain period of time, error processing is performed.

(Step S660-13)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the specific area entry flag is turned on. As a result, if it is determined that the specific area entry flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S660-15, and if it is determined that the specific area entry flag is not ON, the process is moved to step S660-21. .

(Step S660-15)
The main CPU 300a turns off the specific area entry flag.

(Step S660-17)
The main CPU 300a confirms the type of the small winning symbol, and puts a predetermined number (counter value corresponding to the type of special symbol = the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the number of rounds) in the special electric accessory maximum operation count counter as a counter value , Set the number of round games in the big role game).

(Step S660-19)
The main CPU 300a sets the special game management phase to 03H, and terminates the big winning opening closing valid process.

(Step S660-21)
The main CPU 300a executes an ending time setting process for saving the ending time in the special game timer.

(Step S660-23)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to a value obtained by adding 01H to the current value ("06H" or "0AH").

(Step S660-25)
The main CPU 300a sets an ending designation command indicating the start of the ending in the transmission buffer, and terminates the special winning opening closing enable process.

FIG. 44 is a flow chart for explaining the big winning opening end wait process in the main control board 300 according to the first and second reference examples. This big winning opening end wait process is executed when the special game management phase is "06H" and "0AH".

(Step S670-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the special game timer saved in step S660-7 is not "0". As a result, when it is determined that the timer value of the special game timer is not "0", the big winning opening end wait process is terminated, and when it is determined that the timer value of the special game timer is "0", step The process moves to S670-3.

(Step S670-3)
The main CPU 300a executes state setting processing for setting the game state after the end of the big win game. Here, the game state after the end of the big win game is set based on the type of the special symbol that triggered the execution of the big win game or the small winning game. Specifically, when the special symbols are the special symbols A and a, the time saving game state is set and the time saving number of times is set to one. Further, when the special symbols are the special symbols B, C, b and c, the time saving game state is set and the number of times of time saving is set to 7 times.

In addition, when the game ball does not enter the specific area 140b in the small winning game although the small winning is won, the game state after the small winning game is maintained in the game state before the small winning game. Alternatively, when the game ball does not enter the specific area 140b in the small winning game, the game state after the small winning game may be set to a non-time-saving gaming state. Further, when the game ball does not enter the specific area 140b in the small winning game, the game state after the small winning game is set to the time saving game state and the number of times of time saving is set to a preset predetermined number. You can do it. Alternatively, depending on the type of the small hit symbol, the setting of the game state when the game ball does not enter the specific area 140b and the setting of the number of times of time saving may be changed.

Also, here, based on the big winning pattern that triggered the execution of the big win game or the small winning pattern that triggered the execution of the small winning game, and the setting value during setting, after the big winning game or the small winning game A process of setting the variable state is also performed.

(Step S670-5)
The main CPU 300a sets, in the transmission buffer, a game state change designation command for transmitting the game state and variation state set after the end of the big win game.

(Step S670-7)
The main CPU 300a sets, in the transmission buffer, the number of times designation command corresponding to the number of times of time saving saved in step S670-3.

(Step S670-9)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to "00H" and ends the big winning opening end wait process. As a result, when special 1 suspension or special 2 suspension is stored, the variable display of the special symbols is resumed.

FIG. 45 is a diagram for explaining the normal game management phase according to the 1st and 2nd reference examples. As already explained, in the first and second reference examples, the processing related to the normal game triggered by the passage of the game ball to the gate 124 is stepwise and repeatedly executed, but in the main control board 300, such Each processing related to the normal game is managed by the normal game management phase.

As shown in FIG. 45, the main ROM 300b stores a plurality of normal game control modules for controlling execution of a normal game, and each normal game control module is associated with a normal game management phase. . Specifically, when the normal game management phase is "00H", a module for executing the "normal symbol variation waiting process" is called, and when the normal game management phase is "01H", A module for executing a "normal symbol fluctuating process" is called, and when the normal game management phase is "02H", a module for executing a "normal symbol stop symbol display process" is called and normal When the game management phase is "03H", a module for executing "ordinary electric accessory winning opening preprocessing" is called, and when the normal game management phase is "04H", "normal A module for executing "Electric Accessory Prize Winning Opening Control Processing" is called, and when the normal game management phase is "05H", a module for executing "Normal Electric Accessory Prize Winning Opening Closing Effective Processing" is called, and when the normal game management phase is "06H", a module for executing "normal electric accessory winning opening end wait process" is called.

FIG. 46 is a flow chart for explaining normal game management processing (step S700) in the main control board 300 according to the one-two reference example.

(Step S700-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the normal game management phase.

(Step S700-3)
The main CPU 300a selects the normal game control module corresponding to the normal game management phase loaded in step S700-1.

(Step S700-5)
The main CPU 300a calls the normal game control module selected in step S700-3 and starts processing.

(Step S700-7)
The main CPU 300a loads a normal game timer that manages the normal game control time.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart for explaining normal symbol variation waiting processing in the main control board 300 according to the one-two reference example. This normal symbol variation waiting process is normally executed when the game management phase is "00H".

(Step S710-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the counter value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter and determines whether the counter value is "0", that is, whether the normal pattern reserved ball number counter is "0". As a result, when it is determined that the counter value is "0", the normal symbol variation waiting process is terminated, and when it is determined that the counter value is not "0", the process proceeds to step S710-3.

(Step S710-3)
The main CPU 300a block-transfers the general pattern reservation (hitting decision random number) stored in the first to fourth storage units of the general pattern reservation storage area to the storage unit with a lower ordinal number. Specifically, the general map hold stored in the second to fourth storage units is transferred to the first to third storage units. In addition, the main RAM 300c is provided with a 0th storage unit to be processed, and transfers the normal pattern suspension stored in the 1st storage unit to the 0th storage unit. In addition, in this normal design storage area shift process, the counter value of the normal design reservation ball number counter is decremented by "1", and a normal design reservation reduction designation command is transmitted to indicate that the normal design reservation has subtracted "1". set in the buffer.

(Step S710-5)
The main CPU 300a loads the winning determination random number transferred to the 0th storage unit, selects a winning determination random number determination table corresponding to the current game state, performs a general pattern lottery, and stores the lottery result. Execute the judgment process.

(Step S710-7)
The main CPU 300a saves the normal symbol stop symbol number corresponding to the result of the normal symbol lottery in step S710-5. In addition, in the one and two reference examples, the normal symbol display 168 is composed of one LED lamp, and in the case of winning, the normal symbol display 168 is lit, and in the case of losing, the normal symbol display 168 is turned on. turn off the light. The normal symbol stop symbol number determined here indicates whether or not the normal symbol display 168 is finally lit. is determined, and in the case of a loss, "1" is determined as the normal symbol stop symbol number.

(Step S710-9)
The main CPU 300a confirms the current game state, selects and sets the corresponding normal symbol variation time data table.

(Step S710-11)
The main CPU 300a determines the normal symbol variation time based on the hit determination random number transferred to the 0th storage unit in step S710-3 and the normal symbol variation time data table set in step S710-9.

(Step S710-13)
The main CPU 300a saves the normal symbol fluctuation time determined in step S710-11 in the normal game timer.

(Step S710-15)
The main CPU 300a executes a process of setting a normal symbol display symbol counter in the normal symbol display device 168 in order to start variable display of normal symbols. When the normal symbol display symbol counter is set to, for example, "0" as the counter value, the normal symbol display 168 is controlled to light up, and when "1" is set as the counter value, the normal symbol is displayed. device 168 is controlled to turn off. Here, a predetermined counter value is set in the normal symbol display symbol counter at the start of variable display of normal symbols.

(Step S710-17)
The main CPU 300a sets a general pattern reservation specification command indicating the general pattern reservation number stored in the general pattern reservation storage area in the transmission buffer.

(Step S710-19)
The main CPU 300a sends a normal symbol designation command to the transmission buffer based on the normal symbol stop symbol number determined in step S710-7, that is, the symbol type (hit symbol or losing symbol) determined by the normal symbol win determination process. set to

(Step S710-21)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "01H" and terminates the normal symbol variation waiting process.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart for explaining the process during normal symbol fluctuation in the main control board 300 according to the one-two reference example. This process during normal symbol fluctuation is normally executed when the game management phase is "01H".

(Step S720-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the normal game timer saved in step S710-13 is "0". As a result, if the timer value is "0", the process moves to step S720-9, and if the timer value is not "0", the process moves to step S720-3.

(Step S720-3)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal symbol display timer that times the lighting time and the extinguishing time of the normal symbol display 168 . Specifically, when the timer value of the normal symbol display timer is "0", a predetermined timer value is set, and when the timer value is "1" or more, from the current timer value Update the timer value to the value decremented by "1".

(Step S720-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the normal symbol display timer is "0". As a result, when it is determined that the timer value of the normal symbol display timer is "0", the processing is shifted to step S720-7, and when it is determined that the timer value of the normal symbol display timer is not "0", the The process during normal design fluctuation is ended.

(Step S720-7)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the normal symbol display symbol counter. Here, when the counter value of the normal symbol display symbol counter is a counter value indicating that the normal symbol display 168 is turned off, the counter value is updated to indicate lighting, and the counter value indicating that the normal symbol display 168 is lit. When it was, it updates to the counter value which shows lights out, and ends the processing during the normal design fluctuation. As a result, the normal symbol display 168 repeats lighting and extinguishing (blinking) at predetermined time intervals over the normal symbol fluctuation time.

(Step S720-9)
The main CPU 300a saves the normal symbol stop symbol number (counter value) determined in step S710-7 in the normal symbol display symbol counter. As a result, the normal symbol display 168 is finally controlled to light or extinguish, and the result of the normal symbol lottery is notified.

(Step S720-11)
The main CPU 300a sets the normal symbol fluctuation stop time, which is the time during which the normal symbols are stopped and displayed, in the normal game timer.

(Step S720-13)
The main CPU 300a sets a normal pattern stop specifying command indicating that the stop display of the normal pattern is started in the transmission buffer.

(Step S720-15)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "02H" and terminates the normal symbol changing process.

FIG. 49 is a flow chart for explaining normal symbol stop symbol display processing in the main control board 300 according to the one-two-species reference example. This normal symbol stop symbol display process is executed when the normal game management phase is "02H".

(Step S730-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the normal game timer set in step S720-11 is not "0". As a result, when it is determined that the timer value of the normal game timer is not "0", the normal symbol stop symbol display process is terminated, and when it is determined that the timer value of the normal game timer is "0". The process moves to step S730-3.

(Step S730-3)
The main CPU 300a confirms the result of the normal drawing lottery.

(Step S730-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the result of the general pattern lottery is winning. As a result, if it is determined that it is a hit, the process moves to step S730-9, and if it is determined that it is not a win (it is a loss), the process moves to step S730-7.

(Step S730-7)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "00H" and terminates the normal symbol stop symbol display process. As a result, the normal game management processing based on one normal pattern reservation is completed, and when the normal pattern reservation is stored, the processing for starting the variable display of the normal pattern based on the next reservation is performed. becomes.

(Step S730-9)
The main CPU 300a refers to the data of the opening/closing control pattern table, and saves the time before opening the general electric power to the normal game timer as a timer value.

(Step S730-11)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "03H" and terminates the normal symbol stop symbol display process. As a result, the opening/closing control of the second starting port 122 is started.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart for explaining the normal electric accessory winning opening pre-opening process in the main control board 300 according to the first and second reference examples. This normal electric accessory winning opening pre-opening process is executed when the normal game management phase is "03H".

(Step S740-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the normal game timer is not "0". As a result, when it is determined that the timer value of the normal game timer is not "0", the normal electric accessory winning opening pre-opening process is terminated, and when it is determined that the timer value of the normal game timer is "0" , the process moves to step S741.

(Step S741)
The main CPU 300a executes normal electric accessory winning opening opening/closing switching processing. This ordinary electric accessory winning opening opening/closing switching process will be described later.

(Step S740-3)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "04H", and terminates the normal electric accessory winning opening pre-opening process.

FIG. 51 is a flowchart for explaining normal electric accessory winning opening opening/closing switching processing in the main control board 300 according to the first and second reference examples.

(Step S741-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value of the normal electric accessory opening/closing switching number cutting counter is the upper limit value of the normal electric accessory opening/closing switching number (the number of opening/closing times of the movable piece 122b during one opening/closing control). As a result, when it is determined that the counter value is the upper limit value, the normal electric accessory winning opening opening/closing switching process is terminated, and when it is determined that the counter value is not the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S741-3. Move.

(Step S741-3)
The main CPU 300a refers to the data in the opening/closing control pattern table, and based on the counter value of the normal electric accessory switching switching counter, solenoid control data (energization control data or Energization stop control data), and timer data that is the energization time (solenoid energization time) or the energization stop time of the normal electric accessories solenoid 122c (normal power closing valid time = pause time) is extracted.

(Step S741-5)
Based on the solenoid control data extracted in step S741-3, the main CPU 300a starts energizing the normal electric accessory solenoid 122c, or the normal electric role for stopping the energization of the normal electric accessory solenoid 122c. Executes an object solenoid energization control process. By executing this normal electric accessory solenoid energization control process, in the above steps S400-31 and S400-33, the normal electric accessory solenoid 122c is controlled to start or stop energization.

(Step S741-7)
The main CPU 300a saves the timer value based on the timer data extracted in step S741-3 in the normal game timer. In addition, the timer value saved in the normal game timer here is the maximum opening time of the second starting port 122 once.

(Step S741-9)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the normal electric accessory solenoid 122c is in the energization start state, that is, whether the control process for starting the energization of the normal electric accessory solenoid 122c has been performed in step S741-5. As a result, when it is determined that it is in the energization start state, the process is moved to step S741-11, and when it is determined that it is not in the energization start state, the normal electric accessory winning opening opening/closing switching process ends.

(Step S741-11)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the normal electric accessary product open/close switching number cutting counter to a value obtained by adding "1" to the current counter value.

FIG. 52 is a flowchart for explaining normal electric accessory winning opening control processing in the main control board 300 according to the first and second reference examples. This normal electric accessory winning opening control process is executed when the normal game management phase is "04H".

(Step S750-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the normal game timer saved in step S741-7 is not "0". As a result, when it is determined that the timer value of the normal game timer is not "0", the process proceeds to step S750-5, and when it is determined that the timer value of the normal game timer is "0", step S750. -3 is processed.

(Step S750-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the counter value of the normal electric accessory opening/closing switching number cutting counter is the upper limit value of the normal electric accessory opening/closing switching number. As a result, when it is determined that the counter value is the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S750-7, and when it is determined that the counter value is not the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S741.

(Step S741)
In the above step S750-3, when it is determined that the counter value of the normal electric accessory opening/closing switching number cutting counter is not the upper limit value of the normal electric accessory opening/closing switching number of times, the main CPU 300a executes the processing of step S741. Execute.

(Step S750-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value of the normal electric accessory winning ball number counter updated in step S530-9 has reached the specified number, that is, the second start port 122 is opened and closed once. It is determined whether or not the same number of game balls as the maximum winning possible number have entered. As a result, if it is determined that the specified number has not been reached, the normal electric accessory winning opening control process is terminated, and if it is determined that the specified number has been reached, the process proceeds to step S750-7.

(Step S750-7)
The main CPU 300a stops energizing the normal electric accessory solenoid 122c and executes normal electric accessory closing processing necessary to close the second starting port 122. FIG. As a result, the second starting port 122 is closed.

(Step S750-9)
The main CPU 300a saves the normal electric valid state time in the normal game timer.

(Step S750-11)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "05H", and terminates the normal electric accessory winning opening control process.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart for explaining normal electric accessory winning opening closing effective processing in the main control board 300 according to the first and second reference examples. This normal electric accessory winning opening closing valid process is executed when the normal game management phase is "05H".

(Step S760-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the normal game timer saved in step S750-9 is not "0". As a result, when it is determined that the timer value of the normal game timer is not "0", the normal electric accessory winning opening closing effective process is terminated, and the timer value of the normal game timer is determined to be "0". If so, the process moves to step S760-3.

(Step S760-3)
The main CPU 300a saves the normal electric end wait time in the normal game timer.

(Step S760-5)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "06H", and terminates the normal electric accessory winning opening closing valid process.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart for explaining normal electric accessory winning opening end wait processing in the main control board 300 according to the first and second reference examples. This normal electric accessory winning opening end wait process is executed when the normal game management phase is "06H".

(Step S770-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the normal game timer saved in step S760-3 is not "0". As a result, when it is determined that the timer value of the normal game timer is not "0", the normal electric accessory winning opening end wait process is terminated, and the timer value of the normal game timer is determined to be "0". If so, the process moves to step S770-3.

(Step S770-3)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "00H", and ends the normal electric accessory winning opening end wait process. As a result, when normal pattern suspension is stored, the variable display of normal patterns is resumed.

As described above, a special game and a normal game progress by executing various processes in the main control board 300. During the progress of such a game, commands transmitted from the main control board 300 Based on, in the sub-control board 330, control for executing various effects is performed. A reference example of production is shown below.

<Production reference example>
FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining an example of the variation effect of the non-reach variation pattern according to the reference example of effect. As described above, when the main control board 300 carries out the big win lottery, during the variable display of the special symbols, that is, over the time period during which the special symbols fluctuate, the variable performance for notifying the result of the big win lottery is executed. In this variable effect, various background images are displayed in the main effect display section 200a, and effect patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c are displayed superimposed on the background image. During the variable effect, along with the image displayed on the main effect display unit 200a, sound is output from the audio output device 206, the lighting of the effect lighting device 204 is controlled, and the effect accessory device 202 is turned on. The movement is controlled, but detailed description is omitted here.

The variation production according to the production reference example is roughly divided into a reach-less variation pattern and a reach variation pattern. In the variation effect of the no-reach variation pattern, a background image (not shown) is displayed on the main effect display section 200a, and the effect symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are superimposed on the background image and variably displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 55(a), it is assumed that performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are stop-displayed in a combination indicating that the winning lottery result is lost. In this state, when the variable display of the special symbols is newly performed, three performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are variably displayed as shown in FIG. (scroll display). Note that the downward white arrows in the drawing indicate that the effect symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are scroll-displayed in the height direction.

Then, as shown in FIG. 55(c), the effect symbol 210a is first stopped and displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 55(d), the effect symbol 210c different from the effect symbol 210a is stopped and displayed. Then, at almost the same timing as when the variable display of the special symbols is completed and the special symbols are stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 160 or the second special symbol display device 162, as shown in FIG. 55(e). , and the effect symbol 210b is stopped and displayed, and the player is notified of the big role lottery result by the final stop display mode of the three effect symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c at this time.

FIG. 56 is a diagram for explaining an example of a variation effect of a normal reach variation pattern according to a reference example of effect. In the production reference example, the reach fluctuation pattern is roughly classified into a normal reach fluctuation pattern, a developed reach fluctuation pattern, and a pseudo-continuous reach fluctuation pattern. In the variation effect of the normal reach variation pattern, similar to the variation effect of the non-reach variation pattern, the variation display of the effect symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c is started along with the start of the variation display of the special symbols, and FIG. As shown, the effect symbol 210a is first stopped and displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 56(b), the same production pattern 210c as the production pattern 210a is stop-displayed.

In this way, when the same effect symbols 210a and 210c are displayed in the stop-display ready-to-win manner in the main effect display portion 200a, as shown in FIG. "Reach" is displayed superimposed on 210a and 210c. A plurality of types of ready-to-win modes are provided, and the same performance symbols 210a and 210c marked with any of the numbers "1" to "9" are stopped and displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 56(d), the variable display is continued with the shapes of the effect symbols 210a and 210c different from those before the ready-to-win mode. Then, as shown in FIG. 56(e), finally, a performance symbol 210b different from the performance symbols 210a and 210c is stop-displayed, and the player is informed that the result of the big role lottery is a loss.

FIG. 57 is a diagram for explaining an example of a variation effect of the development reach variation pattern at the time of losing according to the performance reference example, and FIG. It is a figure explaining. As shown in FIGS. 57(a) to (d) and FIGS. 58(a) to (d), the variation effect of the developed reach variation pattern is similar to the variation effect of the normal reach variation pattern, in the main effect display section 200a, The effect symbols 210a and 210c are displayed in a ready-to-win mode, and then a ready-to-win development effect is executed in which a predetermined developed image (moving image) is reproduced and displayed. In this reach development effect, for example, as shown in FIGS. As shown in f) and (g), an image for accomplishing the mission is displayed.

Here, the development images for the ready-to-win development effect are roughly divided into a losing pattern and a jackpot pattern. In the development image of the losing pattern, as shown in FIG. After that, as shown in FIG. 57(i), performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are stop-displayed in a combination that notifies a failure. On the other hand, in the development image of the jackpot pattern, as shown in FIG. 58(h), an image showing the success of the mission is finally displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 210c is stop-displayed with a combination of notifying a big win.

In addition, as described above, the ready-to-reach development production includes, for example, a mission production in which an advanced image of the content of challenging a mission is displayed, and a battle production in which an advanced image in which an ally character and an enemy character battle each other is displayed. It is The mission presentation is provided with a plurality of execution patterns with different mission contents, and the battle presentation is provided with a plurality of execution patterns with different appearing characters and fighting methods. Further, as described above, the execution pattern of the mission production is roughly divided into a big win pattern for achieving the mission and a losing pattern for failing the mission. It is roughly divided into a jackpot pattern in which a player wins against a player and a losing pattern in which a friendly character is defeated by an enemy character.

The big hit pattern and the losing pattern have the same content until the final stage of the production, and differ in points such as whether the ally character wins or loses in the end, or whether the mission is accomplished or not. . Therefore, during the ready-to-win development effect, the player cannot identify the result of the big role lottery until the final stage of the variable effect, and the player is given a sense of expectation for a big win.

The big win pattern is selected only when the result of the big win lottery is a big win, and the losing pattern is selected only when the result of the big win lottery is a loss. However, in one variable production, the reach development production may be executed twice, and in this case, the first reach development production is executed in a losing pattern, and the second reach development production is a losing pattern. Or run in a jackpot pattern. Below, the flow of the effect when the ready-to-win development effect is executed twice in one variable effect will be described.

FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining an example of a variable effect when the ready-to-win development effect according to the effect reference example is executed twice. For example, assume that the mission effects are executed as shown in FIGS. 59(a) and (b) after the effect symbols 210a and 210c are displayed in the ready-to-win mode. So far, there is no difference from the case where the reach development effect is executed only once in one variable effect, but immediately after being informed that the mission could not be achieved, as shown in FIG. , "REACH UP" is displayed on the main effect display section 200a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 59(d), the main effect display section 200a displays the development image for the battle effect, and the second ready-to-win development effect is started. The developed image for the battle production has a content in which an ally character and an enemy character fight each other, and when the jackpot is won, the ally character finally wins over the enemy character as shown in FIG. 59(e). , and as shown in FIG. 59(f), performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are stop-displayed in combination to notify a big win. On the other hand, in the event of a failure, as shown in FIG. 59(g), the ally character is finally defeated by the enemy character, and as shown in FIG. A stop display is displayed in combination.

FIG. 60 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation effect of a pseudo-continuous reach variation pattern according to the reference example of effect. As shown in FIG. 60(a), when the variable display of the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c is started, as shown in FIG. 210b and 210c are temporarily stopped and displayed in one of a plurality of preset pseudo modes. In this pseudo mode, for example, the same production patterns 210a and 210b and a production pattern 210c with a number "2" larger than these production patterns 210a and 210b are temporarily stopped and displayed.

When the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c are temporarily stopped and displayed in the pseudo mode, the variable display of the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c is resumed as shown in FIG. 60(c). That is, it can be said that the pseudo mode shows the re-variation display of the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c. After that, as shown in FIG. 60(d), the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are temporarily stopped and displayed again in a pseudo mode.

Then, as shown in FIG. 60(e), when the variable display of the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c is restarted, the performance symbols 210a and 210c are displayed in a ready-to-win mode, as shown in FIG. 60(f). Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 60(g) to (i), the reach development effect is executed in the same manner as the development reach variation pattern, and the player is informed of the result of the winning lottery.

Thus, the variation effect of the pseudo-continuous reach variation pattern is different from the variation effect of the development reach variation pattern until the production patterns 210a and 210c become the reach mode, and after becoming the reach mode, the development Variation production will proceed in the same manner as the reach variation pattern.

In the pseudo-continuous reach variation pattern, a plurality of variable display patterns of the production patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c until reaching the reach mode are provided, and the production patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c are temporarily stopped for each fluctuation display pattern. The number of times of display, in other words, the number of variable display times of the effect symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are different. This variable display pattern is determined by a variable mode command. The selection ratio of the variation mode command at the time of winning the jackpot and at the time of losing is set so that the degree") is high.

Specifically, when the result of the big win lottery is a big hit, the selection ratio of the variable mode command with a large number of variable display times is set higher than the selection ratio of the variable mode command with a small number of variable display times, When the result of the big role lottery is a loss, the selection ratio of the variation mode command with a small number of variations display is set higher than the selection ratio of the variation mode command with a large number of variations display.

Further, in the main control board 300, the reliability of the pseudo-continuous reach variation pattern is set to be higher than the reliability of the developed reach variation pattern. Therefore, the reliability is suggested by the number of temporary stop displays (fluctuation displays) of the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c, and the player is expected to see more temporary stop displays (variation displays) of the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c. While expecting to be done, we will watch the whereabouts of the production.

The execution pattern of the variable effect described above is determined and controlled by the sub control board 330 based on the variation command determined by the main control board 300 . That is, it can be said that the execution pattern of the variable effect is determined in cooperation with the main control board 300 and the sub control board 330 .

61A and 61B are diagrams for explaining the variable effect determination table according to the effect reference example, FIG. 61(a) shows the first half variable effect determination table, and FIG. 61(b) shows the second half variable effect determination table. As described above, when the main control board 300 conducts the big win lottery, variation commands are determined based on the results of the big win lottery, and each determined command is sent to the sub control board 330 . In the sub-control board 330, when receiving the variation mode command, it acquires a production random number of 1 from the range of 0 to 249, refers to the first half variation production determination table, and outputs the acquired production random number and the received variation mode command. Based on, the execution pattern of the variable performance in the first half is determined. In addition, when receiving the variation pattern command, it acquires a production random number of 1 from the range of 0 to 249, refers to the second half variation production determination table, and based on the acquired production random number and the received variation pattern command, The execution pattern of the variable performance in the second half is determined. In addition, in FIG. 61, only a part of the first half variable effect determination table and the second half variable effect determination table are extracted and shown.

As shown in FIG. 61, according to the first half variation performance determination table, the selection ratio for the execution pattern of the first half variation performance is set for each variation mode number (variation mode command), and according to the second half variation performance determination table For example, for each variation pattern number (variation pattern command), the selection ratio for the second half variation performance execution pattern is set. By combining and executing the execution patterns of the determined first half and second half of the variable performance, one variable performance is executed.

As for the variation effect of the reachless variation pattern, "none" indicating that the first half variation effect is not executed is determined as the first half execution pattern, and "normal loss 1" corresponding to the reachless variation pattern is determined as the second half execution pattern. , "Normal Loss 2", "Special Loss 1", and "Special Loss 2" are determined. For example, when receiving a variation mode command corresponding to a variation mode number of "01H" indicating that the first half variation performance is not executed, the sub control board 330 always determines "none" as the first half execution pattern. Also, at this time, in the fluctuation pattern command that can be received at the same time, only one of "normal loss 1", "normal loss 2", "special loss 1", and "special loss 2" is determined. A selection ratio is set in the variable effect determination table. Therefore, "none" is determined as the execution pattern in the first half, and "normal loss 1", "normal loss 2", "special loss 1", and "special loss 2" are determined as the execution pattern in the second half. The effect execution pattern is determined to be the non-reach variation pattern described above.

On the other hand, for the reach variation pattern variation effects, the first half of the execution pattern is determined to be anything other than "none", and the second half of the execution pattern is determined to be one of the reach development effects (indicated by developments 1 to 5 in the figure). is executed if In other words, in the main effect display section 200a, when the variation effect of the reach variation pattern is executed, the variation mode command corresponding to the variation mode number other than the variation mode number = 01H is always received, and the variation mode command is received. A variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern number for which one of 1 to 5 is determined is received.

Here, in FIG. 61(a), "Normal reach 1", "Normal reach 2", etc. in the first half of the execution pattern, respectively, among the fluctuation effects of the normal reach fluctuation pattern, the production patterns 210a, 210b, 210c are in the reach mode. More specifically, it shows the changing display patterns of the background image and the effect symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c displayed on the main effect display section 200a until the reach development effect is started. These image patterns are designed in advance to coincide with the variable display time of the special symbol associated with the variable mode number. For example, when "normal reach 1" is determined, FIG. The image shown in (d) is displayed on the main effect display section 200a.

In addition, in FIG. 61(a), "pseudo 2a" and the like in the first half of the execution pattern are displayed on the main effect display section 200a until the reach development effect is started among the variable effects of the pseudo continuous reach variation pattern. This shows the display pattern of the main fluctuation effect image, that is, the execution pattern of the symbol display effect in which the effect symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are variably displayed. For example, "pseudo 2a" is a pseudo continuous reach fluctuation pattern of "pseudo 2" in which the number of times of fluctuation display of the production patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c is two, and that the main fluctuation production image is the display pattern a. showing. In addition, "pseudo 3b" is a pseudo continuous reach fluctuation pattern of "pseudo 3" in which the number of times of fluctuation display of the production patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c is 3, and that the main fluctuation production image is the display pattern b. showing.

In addition, in the first half variation performance determination table and the second half variation performance determination table shown in FIG. 61, the variation performance of the non-reach variation pattern and the normal reach variation pattern is executed only when the result of the big role lottery is a loss. , the selection ratio is set. In addition, the development reach variation pattern and the pseudo-continuous reach variation pattern are determined both at the time of loss and at the time of the big hit, but the development reach variation pattern has a higher selection ratio at the time of loss than the pseudo-continuous reach variation pattern, and the jackpot The time selection ratio is set low. In this way, by setting the selection ratio at the time of losing and at the time of the big hit, the pseudo-continuous reach variation pattern is set with higher reliability than the development reach variation pattern.

Furthermore, among the pseudo continuous reach fluctuation patterns, the higher the number of times of simulation, the higher the selection ratio at the time of the big win, and the lower the selection ratio at the time of losing, and the more the number of times of simulation, the higher the reliability is done.

As described above, the rough flow of the variable performance is determined by the variable performance determination table. Execution availability and execution patterns are further determined. Here, the element effect is, for example, the variable display of the effect patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c in the main effect display section 200a, the development image displayed in the main effect display section 200a in the reach development effect, Furthermore, it refers to all effects that constitute variable effects, such as effects that move the effect accessory device 202 . In the embodiment, as an elemental effect that constitutes the variable effect, an advance notice effect (suggestive effect) is executed at various timings during the variable effect.

This notice effect is the start of the variable effect, the re-variation display of the effect patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c in the variable effect of the pseudo continuous reach variation pattern, and the main effect display section 200a during the reach development effect. It is an effect such as displaying a predetermined image at the time or moving the effect accessory device 202 at a predetermined timing. A plurality of types of execution patterns are provided for each of the advance notice effects, and for each of the plurality of types of execution patterns, a selection ratio is set for each variation pattern command or variation mode command, in other words, for each whether or not a jackpot is won. An expected value is set for each execution pattern by the selection ratio.

As described above, in the sub-control board 330, when the variable command is received, the execution pattern of the variable performance, whether or not each element performance can be executed, and the execution pattern are determined, and the variable performance is executed during the variable display of the special symbols. The Rukoto. In this way, the variable performance is performed once for one time of variable display of the special symbols, but in the embodiment, the performance over multiple times of variable display of the special symbols is also performed.

FIG. 62 is a diagram illustrating an example of a pending display effect according to the effect reference example. A pending display area 211 is provided at the bottom of the main effect display section 200a. Although not shown in FIGS. 55 to 60, the holding display area 211 is always displayed on the main effect display section 200a during the variable effect and during the game standby. A suspension display effect is performed in the suspension display area 211 during the variable effect. In the pending display effect, the pending display 212a indicating the pending read out to the processing area (0th storage unit) at the time of the big role lottery, stored in the first to fourth storage units of the first special figure pending storage area A first pending display 212b, a second pending display 212c, a third pending display 212d, and a fourth pending display 212e are displayed in the pending display area 211, respectively, indicating the pending. In the following description, the pending display 212a and the first pending display 212b to the fourth pending display 212e are collectively referred to as the pending display 212. FIG.

For example, when the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner and four special 1 reserves are stored in the main RAM 300c, the reserve display 212a and the first reserve display are displayed as shown in FIG. A total of five pending displays 212 from 212b to a fourth pending display 212e are displayed in the pending display area 211. FIG. Then, from this state, the variable display of the special symbol ends, the special 1 reservation stored in the first storage unit is read out to the processing area (0th storage unit), and the big win lottery is performed, and the main RAM 300c. When the hold shift process is executed, as shown in FIG. 62(b), the hold display 212a is erased, and the first hold display 212b to the fourth hold display 212e are moved to the left by one. . Further, when the next special 1 suspension is read from this state, each suspension display 212 is further moved and displayed as shown in FIG. 62(c). In this way, the pending display effect is an effect of informing the player of the special 1 pending number stored in the main RAM 300c.

In addition, a plurality of display patterns are provided for the pending display 212, and the display colors are different for each display pattern. In the main control board 300, when the suspension is stored, the effect determination process at the time of acquisition (step S536) is executed, and the variation information determined when the newly stored suspension is read out to the 0th storage unit. to the sub control board 330. In the sub control board 330, when receiving the prefetch designation command, the display pattern of the hold display corresponding to the newly stored hold is determined based on the received command. At this time, the selection ratio of each display pattern is set for each look-ahead designation command, that is, for each variation information determined when the newly stored hold is read out in the big role lottery. That is, since the selection ratio of each display pattern is set according to whether or not the jackpot is won and the execution pattern of the variable effect, the display pattern of the pending display 212 suggests the reliability (expected value) of the jackpot. It will happen.

FIG. 63(a) is a diagram for explaining the final pending display pattern determination table, and FIG. 63(b) is a diagram for explaining the previous pending display pattern determination table. As described above, in the effect determination process at the time of acquisition in the main control board 300, the pre-reading designation command indicating the variation mode number and the variation pattern number determined when the newly stored hold is read is sent to the sub control board 330 Send to That is, the prefetch designation command is a command to transmit to the sub control board 330 the variation mode number and variation pattern number determined when the suspension is read. According to the final pending display pattern determination table, the selection ratio of the display pattern of the pending display 212 is set for each prefetching designation command (variation pattern number). The display pattern, that is, the final display pattern of the pending display 212a is determined.

According to the final pending display pattern determination table shown in FIG. Rainbow)” is determined. Then, when the final display pattern of the pending display 212a is determined, the display pattern of the pending display 212 to be displayed before that is determined by referring to the previous pending display pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63(b). determined by According to this one-preceding pending display pattern determination table, the selection ratio of the display pattern of the pending display 212 to be displayed before the moving display is set for each display pattern of the pending display 212 .

For example, in the main control board 300, when the suspension is stored in the second storage unit of the first special figure suspension storage area, referring to the final suspension display pattern determination table, the final display pattern of the suspension display 212a is determined. In this case, next, the display pattern of the first pending display 212b is determined with reference to the previous pending display pattern determination table. At this time, the display pattern of the first pending display 212b is determined based on the final display pattern of the pending display 212a previously determined. For example, when the final display pattern of the pending display 212a is "blue", according to the previous pending display pattern determination table, the display pattern of the first pending display 212b is "flashing" at 200/250. , and "blue" is determined with a probability of 50/250.

After the display pattern of the first reserved display 212b is determined in this manner, the immediately previous reserved display pattern determination table is again based on the previously determined display pattern of the first reserved display 212b. The display pattern of the second pending display 212c is determined with reference to this.

As described above, when the hold is stored, first, the final display pattern of the hold display 212a is determined, and then, based on the determined final display pattern of the hold display 212a, the first hold The display patterns are sequentially determined such that the display pattern of the display 212b is determined and the display order is reversed. According to the immediately preceding pending display pattern determination table, the selection ratio is set so that only the display pattern that is the same as the display pattern of the previously determined pending display 212 or has a low reliability is determined. It is

As described above, in the pending display effect, the pending display 212 is provided with a plurality of display patterns with different expected values for the provision of a predetermined game profit. The pending display 212 may be displayed in one display pattern from the time it is first displayed on the main effect display section 200a until it is finally erased, or the display pattern may change during the display period. sometimes.

In the production reference example, the timing at which the change in the display pattern of the hold display 212 occurs is that the newly stored special 1 hold (hereinafter also referred to as target hold) moves to the first hold display 212b to the third hold display 212d. It is roughly divided into the timing when the target is held and during the target change effect related to the target hold.

Next, the processing in the sub-control board 330 for executing the variable effect will be described. In addition, below, among the processes in the sub-control board 330, the description of the processes irrelevant to the variation effect will be omitted.

(Sub CPU initialization processing of sub control board 330)
FIG. 64 is a flow chart for explaining the sub-CPU initialization process (S1000) of the sub-control board 330 according to the production reference example.

(Step S1000-1)
When the power is turned on, the sub CPU 330a reads a CPU initialization processing program from the sub ROM 330b and initializes and sets flags stored in the sub RAM 330c.

(Step S1000-3)
Next, the sub CPU 330a performs processing for updating each effect random number, and thereafter repeatedly performs the processing of step S1000-3 until interrupt processing is performed. A plurality of types of effect random numbers are provided, and here, each effect random number is asynchronously updated.

(Sub-timer interrupt processing of sub-control board 330)
FIG. 65 is a flowchart for explaining the sub-timer interrupt processing (S1100) of the sub-control board 330 according to the production reference example. The sub-control board 330 is provided with a reset clock pulse generation circuit (not shown) that generates a clock pulse at a predetermined cycle (30 times per second). When a clock pulse is generated by the reset clock pulse generation circuit, the sub CPU 330a reads the timer interrupt processing program and starts the sub timer interrupt processing.

(Step S1100-1)
The sub CPU 330a saves the register.

(Step S1100-3)
The sub CPU 330a performs processing for permitting interrupts.

(Step S1100-5)
The sub CPU 330 a updates various timer counters used in the sub control board 330 . Here, the various timer counters are decremented by 1 each time the sub-timer interrupt processing of the sub-control board 330 is executed, and the decrementation is stopped when it reaches 0, unless otherwise specified.

(Step S1200)
The sub CPU 330a analyzes the commands stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 330c and performs various processes according to the received commands. In the sub control board 330, when a command is transmitted from the main control board 300, command reception interrupt processing is performed, and the command transmitted from the main control board 300 is stored in the reception buffer. Here, the commands stored in the reception buffer are analyzed by command reception interrupt processing.

(Step S1100-7)
The sub CPU 330a refers to the timetable and performs a time schedule management process for executing the process corresponding to the time stored in the timetable. Here, based on the time data set in the timetable, various flags are turned on and off, or by sending commands to each production device, various productions such as variable production and large role production It will control the execution of the production.

(Step S1100-9)
The sub CPU 330a restores the register and terminates the sub timer interrupt process.

FIG. 66 is a flow chart for explaining a read-ahead designation command reception process according to a reference example of effect executed when a read-ahead designation command is received in the command analysis process. As described above, the prefetch designation command is set in the main control board 300 in FIG. 31, and then transmitted to the sub-control board 330 by the subcommand transmission processing (see FIG. 21) of step S100-65.

(Step S1210-1)
The sub CPU 330a first analyzes the received prefetch designation command.

(Step S1210-3)
Sub CPU 330a stores advance determination information based on the analysis result of step S1210-1. The sub-RAM 330c of the sub-control board 330 includes a first preliminary determination information storage unit corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage area of the main control board 300, and a second preliminary determination corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage area. An information storage unit is provided. The first prior determination information storage section has four storage sections, ie, a first storage section to a fourth storage section. The first to fourth storage units of these first advance determination information storage units correspond to the first to fourth storage units of the first special figure reservation storage area, respectively. Similarly, the second prior determination information storage unit includes four storage units, first storage unit to fourth storage unit, and the first storage unit to fourth storage unit of the second prior determination information storage unit are: It corresponds to each of the first to fourth storage units of the second special figure reservation storage area. Here, of the first to fourth storage units of the first special figure reservation storage area or the second special figure reservation storage area of the main control board 300, the storage unit corresponding to the storage unit in which the new suspension is stored pre-determination information is stored in.

(Step S1210-5)
The sub CPU 330 a performs final pending display pattern determination processing for determining the final display pattern of the pending display 212 . Here, based on the received prefetch designation command, the final pending display pattern determination table (FIG. 63(a)) is referenced to determine and store the final display pattern of the pending display 212a.

(Step S1210-7)
The sub CPU 330a derives the number of times the display pattern of the pending display 212 is determined, that is, the change timing of the pending display 212, based on the storage unit in which the pending is stored. With reference to (FIG. 63(b)), the display pattern of the pending display 212 is determined. Then, the determined display pattern information of the pending display 212 is stored in a predetermined storage unit, and the process proceeds to step S1210-9.

(Step S1210-9)
Sub CPU 330a performs a hold display start process for starting the display of hold display 212 based on the determinations in steps S1210-5 and S1210-7, and ends the prefetch designation command reception process. Thus, when a hold is stored, the display of the corresponding hold display 212 is started.

FIG. 67 is a flow chart for explaining the variable command reception process executed when a variable command is received, among the command analysis processes according to the reference example of effect. As described above, the variable command is set in the main control board 300 in steps S612-13 and S612-17 in FIG. 330.

(Step S1220-1)
Upon receiving the variation command, the sub CPU 330a first analyzes and stores the received variation pattern command.

(Step S1220-3)
The sub CPU 330a acquires the effect random number (0 to 249) updated in step S1000-3, and based on the acquired effect random number and the analysis result in step S1220-1, determines the execution pattern of the second half of the variable effect. Decide, memorize.

(Step S1220-5)
Sub CPU 330a analyzes and stores the received variation mode command.

(Step S1220-7)
The sub CPU 330a acquires the effect random number (0 to 249) updated in step S1000-3, and based on the acquired effect random number and the analysis result in step S1220-5, determines the execution pattern of the first half of the variable effect. Decide, memorize.

(Step S1220-9)
The sub CPU 330a acquires the effect random number (0 to 249) updated in step S1000-3 for each advance notice effect, and based on the obtained effect random number and the analysis results in steps S1220-1 and S1220-5. , with reference to each notice effect determination table, the presence or absence of execution of each notice effect and the execution pattern are determined and stored.

(Step S1220-11)
Sub CPU 330a executes shift processing for shifting the prior determination information stored in the prior determination information storage unit. Here, when starting the variable effect based on the special 1 suspension, the advance judgment information stored in the fourth storage unit to the second storage unit of the first advance judgment information storage unit, respectively, the first advance judgment information When shifting to the third storage unit to the first storage unit of the storage unit and starting the variable production based on the special 2 hold, the fourth storage unit to the second storage unit of the second advance determination information storage unit is stored. The pre-determination information stored therein is shifted to the third storage unit to the first storage unit of the second pre-determination information storage unit.

(Step S1220-13)
The sub CPU 330a performs a hold display shift process for moving the hold display 212 for display. Further, here, when the display pattern of the pending display 212 changes, execution data for changing the display pattern at a predetermined timing is set.

(Step S1220-15)
The sub CPU 330a sets the time data in the timetable based on the determinations made in the above steps, and terminates the variation command reception process. Based on the timetable set here, in step S1100-7, the process of displaying the image for the variable effect on the main effect display unit 200a, the sound output process, the lighting control process of the effect lighting device 204, etc. Production execution control is performed.

<Example>
Next, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to the reference example described above will be described. In the following, modifications to the reference example described above will be described in the examples. In the following description of the embodiments, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as in the reference example described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. Therefore, the portions of the above-described reference example that are not described as changed portions are naturally included in the present embodiment.

In this embodiment, as in the reference example, the symbol variation display on the second special symbol display device 162 is preferentially executed over the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 160 . However, in the above-described reference example, a maximum of four Special 1 reserves and Special 2 reserves can be stored, while in this embodiment, a maximum of four Special 1 reserves can be stored. , Special 2 hold, the maximum storage number is 0.

That is, in the embodiment, special 2 suspension is not stored. Therefore, when a game ball enters the second starting port 122 during the variable display of symbols on the first special symbol display device 160 or the second special symbol display device 162, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, but special 2 No hold is taken. In other words, even if the game ball enters the second starting port 122 during the variable display of the symbols on the first special symbol display device 160 or the second special symbol display device 162, the player is based on the special 2 reservation. It is not possible to acquire the right of the big role lottery. In order to execute the big win lottery based on the special 2 reservation, the player must not execute the variable display of symbols in either the first special symbol display device 160 or the second special symbol display device 162, and the big win game And it is necessary to enter the game ball into the second starting port 122 in a state where the small winning game is not executed, that is, in a state where the variable display of the symbols can be started immediately.

In addition, in this embodiment, five types of game states are provided: a non-time-saving game state, a slight time-saving game state, an A time-saving game state, a B time-saving game state, and a C time-saving game state. These five types of game states define game progress conditions that are at least partially different from each other, and the game progresses according to the progress conditions corresponding to the game state being set.

Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a normal game is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the gate 124 as in the above-described reference example. In the normal game, a normal pattern lottery is executed, and when a winning pattern is won in the normal pattern lottery, an auxiliary game in which the second start port 122 is controlled to open and close is executed. Here, two patterns of opening and closing modes of the second starting port 122 in the auxiliary game are provided.

Specifically, the opening and closing time of the second start port 122 is short, and the opening and closing state in which the game ball cannot enter the second start port 122, and the opening and closing time of the second start port 122 is long, and the second start An opening/closing mode (specific mode) in which a game ball can enter the mouth 122 is provided. Below, the opening and closing mode of the second starting port 122 that allows game balls to enter, or the auxiliary game in which the second starting port 122 is controlled to open and close in a mode that allows game balls to enter is called long open. On the other hand, the opening and closing mode of the second starting port 122 in which the game ball cannot enter, or the auxiliary game in which the opening and closing of the second starting port 122 is controlled in the state in which the game ball cannot enter is short-circuited. called open.

Further, the opening and closing conditions of the second starting port 122 are different for each of the above five types of game states. The non-short-time gaming state and the short-time gaming state are gaming states in which the second starting port 122 is not opened for a long time, and the A short-time gaming state, B short-time gaming state, and C short-time gaming state are the second starting port 122. is a game state that can be opened for a long time. The non-time-saving game state and the slight time-saving game state have the same long opening probability of the second start port 122 and the opening and closing mode of the second start port 122 in the auxiliary game, and the player can determine both game states from the progress of the game. is nearly impossible to identify.

In addition, the probability that the second starting port 122 is opened for a long time is different between the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, and the C time saving game state, and the advantages are different due to the difference in the long opening probability. Hereinafter, the non-time-saving gaming state and the slight time-saving gaming state are collectively referred to as normal states, and the A time-saving gaming state, B time-saving gaming state, and C time-saving gaming state are collectively referred to as advantageous states.

In addition, in this embodiment, as types of losses, normal losses and specific losses are provided. Since both the normal loss and the specific loss are losses, the big winning opening is not opened like the small winning game or the big winning game. However, when a specific loss is won, there is a possibility that the game state at the time of winning will shift to another game state.

FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining the special 1 jackpot determination random number determination table according to the embodiment. The special 1 jackpot determination random number determination table according to the embodiment is used instead of the special 1 jackpot determination random number determination table according to the reference example. According to the special 1 jackpot determination random number determination table according to the embodiment, when the setting value is set to 1 (registered setting value = 1), the special 1 jackpot determination random number determination shown in Fig. 68 (a) A major role lottery is performed with reference to the table a.

According to this special 1 jackpot determination random number determination table a, when the jackpot determination random number is 10001 to 10298, it is determined as a jackpot, when the jackpot determination random number is 30001 to 36553, it is determined as a specific loss, and other If it is a jackpot decision random number, it is usually determined as a loss. Therefore, the jackpot probability in this case is about 1/219.9, and the specific losing probability is about 1/10.

Also, when the setting value is set to 2 to 6 (registered setting value=2 to 6), as shown in FIGS. A lottery for major roles is conducted with reference to b to f. According to these special 1 jackpot determination random number determination tables b to f, the jackpot determination random numbers determined as the jackpot are set as shown in the figure, and the higher the registered set value, the higher the probability of winning the jackpot.

It should be noted that, in the embodiment, a small winning prize is not won by the big winning lottery based on the special 1 reserve, but it may be constructed so that a small winning prize is won by the big winning lottery based on the special 1 reserve. In addition, here, it is assumed that the probability of winning the specific losing game is the same for all registered setting values, but the winning probability of the specific losing game may differ depending on the registered setting values. In the case where the winning probability of the specific loser is changed depending on the registered set value, it is preferable that the higher the registered set value, the higher the winning probability of the specific loser. However, it may be set so that the higher the registered set value is, the lower the winning probability of the specific loser is.

FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining a special 2 jackpot determination random number determination table according to the embodiment. The special 2 jackpot determination random number determination table according to the embodiment is used instead of the special 2 jackpot determination random number determination table according to the reference example. According to the special 2 jackpot determination random number determination table according to the embodiment, when the setting value is set to 1 (registered setting value = 1), the special 2 jackpot determination random number determination shown in Fig. 69 (a) A major role lottery is performed with reference to the table a. According to the special 2 jackpot determination random number determination table a, when the jackpot determination random number is 10001 to 10298, it is determined as a jackpot, and when it is another jackpot determination random number, it is determined as a small hit. Therefore, the big win probability in this case is about 1/219.9, and the small win probability is about 1/1.

Also, when the setting value is set to 2 to 6 (registered setting value=2 to 6), as shown in FIGS. A lottery for major roles is conducted with reference to b to f. According to the special 2 jackpot determination random number determination table according to the embodiment, as is clear from a comparison of FIGS. 68 and 69, if the registered setting values are the same, the special 1 jackpot determination random number determination table and 2 jackpot determination random number determination table, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same.

In addition, here, in the big role lottery based on the special 2 reservation, there is no specific loss or normal loss. However, it may also be possible to win a specific loser or a normal loser by a large role lottery based on the special 2 reservation.

FIG. 70 is a diagram illustrating a winning symbol random number determination table according to the embodiment. The winning symbol random number determination table according to the embodiment is used instead of the winning symbol random number determination table according to the reference example. When the "jackpot" is won by the special 1 reservation, the special 1 winning symbol random number determination table a is selected as shown in FIG. 70(a). When a jackpot is won based on special 1 reservation, special patterns A and B are determined as jackpot patterns.

Specifically, according to the special 1 per symbol random number determination table a, if the per symbol random number is 0, a special symbol A that is a big hit symbol is determined, and if the per symbol random number is 1 to 99, the big hit A special symbol B, which is a symbol, is determined. Therefore, when a jackpot is won based on special 1 reservation, the probability that the special symbol A is determined is 1%, and the probability that the special symbol B is determined is 99%.

Also, when winning the "specific loss" by holding special 1, as shown in FIG. 70(b), the winning symbol random number determination table b for special 1 is selected. When a specific loss is won based on special 1 reservation, special symbols Xa and Xb are determined as special symbols.

Specifically, according to the special 1 per symbol random number determination table b, if the per symbol random number is 0 to 15, the special symbol Xa is determined, and if the per symbol random number is 16 to 99, the special symbol Xb is determined. Therefore, when the specific loss is won based on the special 1 reservation, the probability that the special symbol Xa is determined is 16%, and the probability that the special symbol Xb is determined is 84%. In the following description, the special symbols determined when the specific losing game is won, that is, the special symbols Xa and Xb are referred to as specific losing symbols.

In addition, when the "big win" is won by the special 2 reservation, as shown in FIG. 70(c), the special 2 winning symbol random number determination table a is selected, and the "small win" is won by the special 2 reservation. In this case, as shown in FIG. 70(d), the special 2 winning symbol random number determination table b is selected.

As shown in FIG. 70(c), when a big win is won based on special 2 reservation, special symbols C and D are determined as big win symbols. Specifically, according to the special 2 per symbol random number determination table a, if the per symbol random number is 0 to 24, a special symbol C that is a big hit symbol is determined, and if the per symbol random number is 25 to 99 , a special symbol D, which is a jackpot symbol, is determined. Therefore, when a jackpot is won based on special 2 reservation, the probability that the special symbol C is determined is 25%, and the probability that the special symbol D is determined is 75%.

Also, as shown in FIG. 70(d), when a small win is won based on special 2 reservation, special symbols a and b are determined as small win symbols. Specifically, according to the special 2 per symbol random number determination table b, if the per symbol random number is 0 to 24, a special symbol a that is a small per symbol is determined, and if the per symbol random number is 25 to 99 For example, a special symbol b, which is a small winning symbol, is determined. Therefore, when a small prize is won based on special 2 reservation, the probability that the special symbol a is determined is 25%, and the probability that the special symbol b is determined is 75%.

Here, the selection ratio of the jackpot pattern and the small hit pattern is common for all set values. good. Also, the types and numbers of special symbols shown in FIG. 70 are merely examples, and the designs can be changed as appropriate.

FIG. 71 is a diagram explaining the first special electric accessory operating ramset table according to the embodiment, and FIG. 72 is a diagram explaining the second special electric accessory operating ramset table according to the embodiment. The first special electric role product operating ram set table and the second special electric role product operating ram set table according to the embodiment are the first special electric role product operating ram set table and the second special electric role product operating ram set table according to the above reference example. Used instead of a Ramset table.

When the special symbols A, B, C, and D that are the jackpot symbols are determined, as shown in FIG. An opening/closing process is executed to control opening/closing according to an opening/closing pattern. Further, when the special symbols a and b, which are the small winning symbols, are determined, the second special electric accessory operating ramset table is referred to, as shown in FIG. An opening/closing process is executed to control the opening/closing of the winning opening 128 in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. The big winning game consists of a plurality of round games in which the first big winning opening 126 is opened and closed a predetermined number of times, and the small winning game is a round game in which the second big winning opening 128 opens and closes a predetermined number of times. be.

In the embodiment, when special symbols A, B, and C, which are jackpot symbols, are determined, a big win game consisting of three round games is executed, and when special symbol D is determined, ten times are performed. A big win game composed of a round game is executed. In each round game, a specified number (10) of game balls enter the first big prize winning port 126, or a predetermined time (29.0 seconds) has passed since the first big winning prize port 126 was opened. Then it ends.

When a game ball enters the big winning hole, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls for one game ball entering the game ball. The prescribed number in one round game is 10, and the number of prize balls for one entering ball is 15, so the player can win 150 prize balls in one round game. can be done. Therefore, when the special symbols A, B, and C are determined, the player can win 450 prize balls in one big role game, and when the special symbol D is determined, the player can 1500 prize balls can be obtained in one big role game.

Also, as shown in FIG. 72, when the special symbols a and b, which are small winning symbols, are determined, first, a small winning game consisting of one round game is executed. In this small winning game, the second big winning opening 128 is opened and closed. At this time, in the small winning game, the second big winning opening 128 repeats opening for 0.1 seconds and closing for 3.0 seconds ten times.

Here, a specific area 140b and a non-specific area 140c are provided inside the second large winning opening 128, and a game ball entering the second large winning opening 128 is always placed in the specific area 140b or the non-specific area. Enter region 140c. Then, in the small winning game, when the game ball entering the second big winning hole 128 enters the specific area 140b, the second big winning is won, and following the small winning game, the first big winning hole 126 is executed.

At this time, if the special symbol a is determined, the round game in which the first big winning hole 126 is opened once for 29.0 seconds is executed twice (2R to 3R), and the special symbol b is determined. Then, a round game is executed nine times (2R to 10R) in which the first big winning hole 126 is opened once for 29.0 seconds. In the following, a series of games from a small win game to a big win game in which the special symbol a is determined and executed is called a 3R big win game, and a series from a small win game to a big win game in which the special symbol b is determined and executed The game is called a 10R big role game.

Although detailed description is omitted, the movable piece 128b that opens and closes the second big prize opening 128 is formed in a corrugated plate shape, and a game ball that falls on the movable piece 128b stays on the movable piece 128b for several seconds. to roll. Therefore, when the game ball is continuously shot toward the second game area 116b during the small winning game, the game ball enters the second big winning hole 128 with certainty.

Further, in the embodiment, for example, the movable member 142 is controlled such that all the game balls entering the second big winning hole 128 enter the specific area 140b. Therefore, in the embodiment, as long as the player is playing the game appropriately, it is possible to make the game ball enter the specific area 140b during the small winning game.

FIG. 73(a) is a diagram explaining the game state setting table 1 according to the embodiment, and FIG. 73(b) is a diagram explaining the game state setting table 2 according to the embodiment. The game state setting table according to the embodiment is used instead of the game state setting table according to the reference example. In the embodiment, when a big win is won in the big win lottery, and when a two-kind big win is won in a small win game, the game state is set according to the type of the winning special symbol.

Specifically, when a so-called one-class jackpot is won, if the determined jackpot symbol type is a special symbol A, the game state after the big win game is set to the C time-saving game state. Similarly, if the types of the determined jackpot symbols are special symbols B, C, and D, the game state after the big win game is set to the A short-time game state, the B short-time game state, and the C short-time game state, respectively. be.

Further, when the game ball enters the specific area 140b during the small winning game after winning the small winning lottery, that is, when winning the two-kind big winning, the determined small winning pattern is the special pattern a. If so, the game state after the big win game is set to the B time saving game state, and if the determined small winning pattern is the special pattern b, the game state after the big win game is set to the C time saving game state.

In addition, in the embodiment, as the time-saving end conditions for ending the time-saving gaming state, special 2 time-saving times, total time-saving times, and normal figure fluctuation times are provided. Special 2 time saving number of times is the number of pattern variation processing based on special 2 suspension (hereinafter referred to as special 2 variation). In addition, the total number of time reduction is the sum of the number of times of pattern variation processing based on special 1 suspension (hereinafter referred to as special 1 variation) and the number of special 2 variations. The number of normal pattern fluctuations is the number of normal game fluctuation processing (hereinafter referred to as normal pattern fluctuation) of the pattern based on the normal pattern reservation. When any one of these three time saving end conditions is established, the time saving game state ends, and the game state shifts to a non-time saving game state.

Here, regardless of the type of special symbol, the number of times of special 2 time saving is set to 1 time, and the total number of times of time saving is set to 10 times. On the other hand, the number of normal pattern fluctuations is set as shown in FIG. 73(a) based on the type of the determined special pattern. Here, when the game state after the big role game is set to the A reduced working hours game state, the normal figure fluctuation frequency is set to 70 times, and when the game state after the big role game is set to the B reduced working hours game state, the normal figure When the number of fluctuations is set to 50 times and the game state after the big win game is set to the C time reduction game state, the normal figure fluctuation number of times is set to 100 times.

Therefore, for example, in the C time-saving game state, when the special 2 variation does not result in winning the first type jackpot or the second type jackpot, the game state shifts from the C time-saving game state to the non-time-saving game state. In addition, in the embodiment, at the start of the 100th normal pattern fluctuation in the C time saving game state, regardless of the result of the normal pattern lottery, the game state shifts to the non-time saving game state. In addition, in the advantageous state, the game state may shift to a non-time-saving game state at the end of the final normal pattern fluctuation out of the normal pattern fluctuation times defined for each type of special symbol.

In addition, here, if the game state that is set after the big win game is common, the normal figure fluctuation frequency that is set is also common. In other words, it can be said that the number of normal pattern fluctuations is defined for each game state that is set after the big win game. However, even if the game state set after the big win game is common, when the determined special symbol types are different, different normal pattern fluctuation times may be set. For example, when the special symbol A is determined and when the special symbol D is determined, both are set to the C time-saving game state, but the normal pattern fluctuation frequency at this time may be different from each other.

Also, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 73(b), when a specific losing game is won, the game state can be changed depending on the type of the determined specific losing symbol and the game state at the time of winning. Specifically, when a special symbol Xa, which is a specific losing symbol, is won and the game state at the time of winning is a non-time-saving game state, the game state is set to the C time-saving game state. At this time, the time saving end condition to be set is the same as the case where the C time saving game state is set by winning the first kind jackpot and the second kind jackpot.

Further, when a special symbol Xb, which is a specific losing symbol, is won and the game state at the time of winning is a non-time-saving game state, the game state is set to a slight time-saving game state. In addition, time saving end conditions are not provided in the slight time saving game state. Therefore, when the time-saving gaming state is set, basically, the time-saving gaming state continues until the first kind jackpot or second kind jackpot is won.

However, in this embodiment, a so-called ceiling function is provided. The ceiling function is the number of times of the big win lottery after the big win game (number of fluctuations), or the number of times of display of the symbols in the first special symbol display device 160 and the second special symbol display device 162 (number of fluctuation display times, number of stop display times), It is a function that the game state shifts from the normal state to the advantageous state when a preset ceiling number of times is reached. Here, the ceiling number of times is set to 656 times, and if neither the 1st kind jackpot nor the 2nd kind jackpot is won in the 656 times big win lottery after the big win game, the game state is set to the C time saving game state. be done.

The number of fluctuations for managing whether or not the ceiling function is activated is continuously counted across all game states. In other words, even if the game state is changed, the number of fluctuations is not reset.

Since the time-saving end condition is not set in the short-time gaming state, the short-time gaming state will not end unless the number of fluctuations reaches the ceiling number of times or the first-class jackpot or second-class jackpot is won. .

In addition, if the game state when the special symbols Xa and Xb are won is a game state other than the non-time-saving game state, the game state is not changed. Therefore, the game state is changed by the winning of the specific loss only during the non-time-saving game state.

FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining a winning determination random number determination table according to the embodiment. The winning determination random number determination table according to the embodiment is used instead of the winning determination random number determination table according to the reference example. In the embodiment, when the game ball passes through the gate 124, one hit determination random number is acquired from within the range of 0 to 65535, and this random number is stored in the normal figure reservation storage area of the main RAM 300c with an upper limit of 4. be done.

Here, in the embodiment, three normal symbols A, B, and C are provided. These three normal designs are all winning designs. Therefore, in the embodiment, when the general pattern lottery is performed, the second starting port 122 is always opened. In the embodiment, regardless of the gaming state, the winning determination random number determination table shown in FIG. 74 is referred to. That is, in the embodiment, the winning probability of each normal symbol is common in all game states. According to the hit determination random number determination table, when the hit determination random number is 10001 to 10298, the normal design A is determined as the type of the normal design, and when the hit determination random number is 10299 to 10656, the normal design The normal design B is determined as the type, and when it is another hit determination random number, the normal design C is determined as the type of the normal design. Therefore, the probabilities that the normal symbols A and B are determined are approximately 1/219.9 and approximately 1/183.0, respectively.

FIG. 75(a) is a diagram for explaining a normal symbol variation time data table according to the embodiment, and FIG. 75(b) is a diagram for explaining an opening/closing control pattern table according to the embodiment. The normal symbol variation time data table and the opening/closing control pattern table according to the embodiment are used instead of the normal symbol variation time data table and the opening/closing control pattern table according to the reference example. According to the normal symbol variation time data table according to the embodiment, when the game state is set to the non-time-saving game state, the variation time is determined to be 60 seconds, and the game state is set to the slight time-saving game state. In this case, the variable time is determined to be 59 seconds, and if the game state is set to the A short-time game state, the B short-time game state, or the C short-time game state, the variable time is set to any one of 1 second to 1 minute. It is determined.

Then, when the winning design is determined by the normal drawing lottery and the determined winning design is displayed on the normal design display device 168, the movable piece 122b of the second start port 122 is shown in FIG. 75(b). As shown, the energization is controlled with reference to the opening/closing control pattern table. Actually, the opening/closing control pattern table is provided for each combination of the game state and the type of the winning symbol. It is set when the solenoid 122c starts to be energized.

According to the opening and closing control pattern table, the time before normal electric opening (waiting time until the opening of the second start port 122 is started), the maximum number of times of opening and closing of the normal electric accessories (the number of times the second start port 122 is opened), Solenoid energization time (Energization time of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 122c for each opening of the second start port 122, that is, opening time of the second start port 122 once), specified number (second start port 122 fully open The maximum number of winnings to the second start port 122 in the inside), the normal power closing effective time (the closing time between each opening of the second start port 122, that is, the pause time), the normal power effective state time (second starting port Waiting time from the end of the last opening of 122), normal electricity end wait time (waiting time until normal symbol fluctuation display is resumed after the passage of normal electricity effective state time) is the control of the second start port 122 Data is stored in advance as shown in the figure for each combination of the game state and the type of winning symbol.

Specifically, when the winning pattern is determined in the non-time-saving game state or the slight time-saving game state, the second start port 122 is opened only once for 0.05 seconds regardless of the type of the winning pattern. Although the detailed explanation is omitted, in the embodiment, it is configured so that the game ball does not enter the second starting port 122 with 0.05 seconds×1 time of opening. Therefore, in the non-time-saving gaming state, the game ball does not enter the second starting port 122 .

In addition, in the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, and the C time saving game state, the opening/closing pattern of the second starting port 122 differs depending on the type of the determined winning symbol. Specifically, in the A time-saving gaming state, when the normal symbols A and B are elected, the second start port 122 is opened twice for 2.9 seconds, and when the normal symbol C is elected, The second starting port 122 is opened only once for 0.05 seconds. The case where the second starting port 122 is opened twice for 2.9 seconds is the above-described long opening of the second starting port 122, and the second starting port 122 is opened only once for 0.05 seconds. The open case is the above-described short-circuit opening of the second starting port 122 .

When the normal pattern lottery is performed, the winning probability of the normal symbol A is about 1/219.9, and the winning probability of the normal symbol B is about 1/183.0. Therefore, the long opening probability of the second starting port 122 in the A time-saving gaming state is approximately 1/99.9.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the embodiment, as long as the player appropriately shoots the game ball to the second game area 116b by opening 2.9 seconds x 2 times, the second start opening is always opened. It is configured such that a game ball enters 122 . Therefore, when the normal symbols A and B are determined in the A time-saving game state, the game ball will surely enter the second start hole 122 if the player is playing the game appropriately. That is, the winning probability of the two-kind jackpot in the A time-saving gaming state is about 1/99.9.

In addition, in the B time-saving game state, when the normal symbol A is won, the second start port 122 is opened 2.9 seconds × 2 times, and when the normal symbols B and C are won, the second start The mouth 122 is opened only once for 0.05 seconds. Therefore, the long opening probability in the B time-saving gaming state is approximately 1/219.9.

In addition, in the C time saving game state, the second starting port 122 is opened twice for 2.9 seconds regardless of the type of the winning normal symbol. Therefore, the long open probability in the C time-saving gaming state is 1/1.

In addition, when the winning pattern is determined, before the second starting port 122 is opened, the time before opening the general electric power is set. This pre-commercial power opening time is a time during which the second starting port 122 is maintained in a closed state, and corresponds to a so-called opening time. When the second starting port 122 is short-circuited and opened, the time before the normal voltage is opened is set to 1.0 second. On the other hand, when the second starting port 122 is opened for a long time, the time before opening the mains is set to 3.0 seconds.

In this way, each game state is associated with an opening/closing condition for opening/closing the second starting port 122 as a game progress condition for each normal symbol type. The opening/closing condition of the second starting port 122 defines three elements, namely, the winning probability of normal symbols, the time of variable display of normal symbols, and the opening condition of the second starting port 122. The conditions are only an example. The opening/closing condition of the second starter opening 122 can be appropriately changed in design within a range in which the playability of the gaming machine 100, which will be described later, can be realized.

FIG. 76 is a diagram explaining the game flow of the gaming machine 100 according to the embodiment. It should be noted that FIG. 76 mainly shows the game flow when the player is playing the game appropriately according to the game characteristics, and the illustration of the case where an irregular situation occurs is omitted. . Here, the game flow when the game is properly played will be described with reference to FIG.

The initial state of the gaming machine 100 is the non-time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 76(a). In the non-time-saving game state, the second start port 122 is not opened for long even if a winning symbol is won in the general lottery. Therefore, in the non-time-saving gaming state, the player needs to strike left to shoot the game ball toward the first game area 116a in order to enter the game ball into the first start hole 120. That is, the non-time-saving gaming state can be said to be a gaming state in which the game progresses by entering the game ball into the first starting port 120 .

When the game ball enters the first start port 120, the special 1 reservation is acquired, and the special 1 variation including the large role lottery based on the special 1 reservation and the variation display and stop display of the symbol on the first special symbol display device 160 is executed. The probability of winning a jackpot in the special 1 variation is about 1/219.9, and the probability of winning a specific loss is about 1/10.

If a specific losing pattern is won in the non-time-saving game state, one of the special patterns Xa and Xb is determined as the specific losing pattern. When the specific losing symbol is won, the probability that the special symbol Xa is determined as the particular losing symbol is 16%, and the probability that the special symbol Xb is determined is 84%. When the special symbol Xa is determined in the non-time-saving game state, the game state shifts to the C time-saving game state shown in FIG. 76(h). Although the details will be described later, the C time-saving gaming state is the most advantageous gaming state for the player, and is a state in which the player can immediately acquire the execution right of a large winning game capable of winning a large number of prize balls.

In this way, in the non-time-saving game state, it is possible to win a specific loss with a probability of about 1/10, and with a probability of 16% when winning a specific loss, it is possible to shift to the most advantageous C time-saving game state. .

On the other hand, when the special symbol Xb is determined in the non-time-saving game state, the game state shifts to the slight time-saving game state shown in FIG. 76(b). In the slight time-saving game state, the second start port 122 is not opened for long even if a winning pattern is won in the normal drawing lottery, similarly to the non-time-saving game state. Therefore, in the short-time gaming state, the player needs to hit left to enter the game ball into the first start hole 120 . That is, it can be said that the slightly time-saving game state is a game state in which the game progresses by entering the game ball into the first start port 120 .

Here, as described above, since the time saving end condition is not provided in the time saving game state, the time saving game state continues until the jackpot is won or the ceiling function is activated. When the number of times of variation reaches the ceiling number of times in the slight time-saving game state or the non-time-saving game state and the ceiling function is activated, the state is shifted to the C time-saving game state which is most advantageous to the player.

It should be noted that, in the time-saving game state, even if a specific loss is won, there is no transition to another game state. That is, in the slightly reduced gaming state, there is no difference between the specific loss and the normal loss. On the other hand, in the non-time-saving game state, the specific loss is won with a probability of about 1/10, and with a probability of 16%, the game shifts to the C time-saving game state, which is most advantageous to the player. Therefore, the non-time-saving gaming state can be said to be a state more advantageous than the slight time-saving gaming state, because there is a possibility of shifting to the C time-saving gaming state due to the winning of a specific loss.

In the non-time-saving game state or the slight time-saving game state, if the jackpot is won by special 1 variation, as shown in FIG. 76(c), the 3R big win game is executed. When a jackpot is won in special 1 variation, either special pattern A or B is determined as a jackpot pattern. At this time, the probability that the special symbol A is determined is 1%, and the probability that the special symbol B is determined is 99%. When the special symbol A is determined, after the 3R big win game, the game state is set to the C time-saving game state, and when the special symbol B is determined, after the 3R big win game, the game state is changed to that of FIG. It is set to the A time-saving game state shown in (d).

The long opening probability of the second starting port 122 in the A time saving game state is about 1/99.9. Therefore, in the A time-saving gaming state, the player needs to hit to the right in order to enter the game ball into the gate 124 . That is, in the A time-saving gaming state, the game progresses by causing the game ball to enter the gate 124, and executing the normal pattern lottery, and the normal pattern fluctuation including the fluctuation display and stop display of the pattern on the normal pattern display device 168. state.

When it is set to the A time saving game state, the normal figure fluctuation frequency is set to 70 times as the time saving end condition. In the A time-saving gaming state, when the long opening of the second start port 122 is won and the game ball enters the second start port 122, the special 2 reservation is acquired, and the major role lottery based on the special 2 reservation, and Special 2 variation including symbol variation display and stop display on the second special symbol display 162 is executed. In this special 2 variation, a big win or a small win is always won.

When a jackpot is won in special 2 variation, special patterns C and D are determined as jackpot patterns. At this time, the probability that the special symbol C is determined is 25%, and the probability that the special symbol D is determined is 75%. When the jackpot is won and the special symbol C is determined as the jackpot symbol, the 3R big win game is executed as shown in FIG. 76(e), and the gaming state after the 3R big win game is shown in FIG. It is set to the B time saving game state shown in .

On the other hand, when the jackpot is won and the special symbol D is determined as the jackpot symbol, the 10R big win game is executed as shown in (g) of FIG. It is set to the C time saving game state shown in h).

Also, in the A time-saving gaming state, when a small hit is won in the special 2 variation, the special patterns a and b are determined as the small hit patterns. At this time, the probability that the special symbol a is determined is 25%, and the probability that the special symbol b is determined is 75%. When the small winning is won, the special symbol a is determined as the small winning symbol, and the game ball enters the specific area 140b during the small winning game and the second kind of big winning is won, as shown in FIG. 76 (e) Then, the 3R big win game is executed, and the game state after the 3R big win game is set to the B time saving game state shown in FIG. 76(f).

On the other hand, when a small win is won, a special symbol b is determined as a small win symbol, and a game ball enters the specific area 140b during a small win game and a two-kind big win is won, (g) of FIG. 76 , the 10R big win game is executed, and the game state after the 10R big win game is set to the C time saving game state shown in FIG. 76(h).

As described above, the player can reliably enter the game ball into the second start hole 122 that is open for long if the game is properly played. Then, when a game ball enters the second starting port 122, a small win or a big win is always won, and a 3R big win game or a 10R big win game is executed. That is, the A time-saving gaming state can be said to be a state aiming to win the long opening of the second starting port 122 with a probability of about 1/99.9 within the range of 70 times of the normal drawing lottery.

In addition, when it is set to the A time saving game state, the special 2 time saving number of times is set to 1 time and the total time saving number of times is set to 10 times as the time saving end condition. Suppose that in the A time-saving gaming state, the second starting port 122 is opened for a long time, and a game ball enters the second starting port 122 that is open for a long time. In this case, the special 2 variation is executed, and if the small winning is won in this special 2 variation, the small winning game is executed. However, if the game ball is not properly shot during the small winning game, the game ball will not enter the second big winning hole 128, and the game ball will not enter the specific area 140b.

Even though the small winning game is executed, if the game ball does not enter the specific area 140b during the small winning game, the time saving end condition (special 2 fluctuation = 1 time) is established, and it becomes a so-called puncture, A The time-saving game state is terminated, and the state is shifted to a non-time-saving game state. Also, for example, even if the special 1 variation is executed 10 times in the A time saving gaming state, the time saving end condition (special 1 variation + special 2 variation = 10 times) is established and becomes a puncture, and the A time saving gaming state is non- Shift to the time-saving game state. Furthermore, when the second starting port 122 is not long open within the range of 70 normal figure fluctuations in the A time-saving game state, the so-called time-saving omission occurs, and the A time-saving game state ends, and the non-time-saving game state transition to

In the B time saving game state shown in (f) of FIG. 76, the long opening probability of the second starting port 122 is set to about 1/219.9. In addition, in the B time saving game state, as time saving end condition, normal figure fluctuation frequency is set to 50 times. Therefore, in the B time-saving game state, if the long opening of the second starting port 122 is not won within the range of 50 normal figure fluctuations, the time-saving omission occurs, and the game state shifts to the non-time-saving game state. In addition, when other time-saving end conditions are established, it becomes punctured, and the B time-saving game state is shifted to a non-time-saving game state.

On the other hand, in the B time saving game state, when the long opening of the second starting port 122 is won and the game ball enters the second starting port 122, special 2 variation is executed. In this special 2 variation, a big win or a small win is always won.

When a jackpot is won in special 2 variation, special patterns C and D are determined as jackpot patterns. At this time, the probability that the special symbol C is determined is 25%, and the probability that the special symbol D is determined is 75%. When the jackpot is won and the special symbol C is determined as the jackpot symbol, the 3R big win game is executed as shown in FIG. is set to

On the other hand, when the jackpot is won and the special symbol D is determined as the jackpot symbol, the 10R big win game is executed as shown in (g) of FIG. It is set to the C time saving game state shown in h).

In addition, in the B time-saving game state, when a small hit is won in the special 2 variation, the special patterns a and b are determined as the small prize patterns. At this time, the probability that the special symbol a is determined is 25%, and the probability that the special symbol b is determined is 75%. When the small winning is won, the special symbol a is determined as the small winning symbol, and the game ball enters the specific area 140b during the small winning game and the second kind of big winning is won, as shown in FIG. 76 (e) Then, the 3R big win game is executed, and the game state after the 3R big win game is set to the B time saving game state shown in FIG. 76(f).

On the other hand, when a small win is won, a special symbol b is determined as a small win symbol, and a game ball enters the specific area 140b during a small win game and a two-kind big win is won, (g) of FIG. 76 , the 10R big win game is executed, and the game state after the 10R big win game is set to the C time saving game state shown in FIG. 76(h).

Further, the long opening probability of the second starting port 122 in the C time saving game state is 1/1. That is, in the C time-saving gaming state, when the game ball is entered into the gate 124 and the normal drawing lottery is executed, the second starting port 122 is always opened for long. Therefore, in the C time-saving gaming state, the player needs to hit to the right in order to enter the game ball into the gate 124 . When it is set to the C time saving game state, the normal figure fluctuation frequency is set to 100 times as the time saving end condition. That is, when the C time-saving game state is set, the player can quickly and reliably open the second starting port 122 for a long time if the player is hitting to the right.

In addition, even in the C time-saving game state, if the player is hitting to the right, the game ball will surely enter the second start port 122 during long opening, and the special 2 fluctuation will always lead to a big hit or a small hit. be elected. In other words, when it shifts to the C time-saving game state, the big role game is immediately executed. It should be noted that the determination probability of the big hit pattern or the small hit pattern at this time is the same as the A time saving game state and the B time saving game state. In addition, although illustration is omitted here, even in the C time saving game state, time saving omission and puncture may occur. In this case, like the A time saving game state and the B time saving game state, it shifts to a non time saving game state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, once it shifts to the C time saving game state, the 10R big role game and the C time saving game state loop with a probability of 75%. Moreover, in the C time-saving game state, the long opening probability of the second starting port 122 is 1/1, so that after the C time-saving game state is set, an important role game can be executed immediately. Therefore, the player can win a large amount of prize balls in a short period of time after shifting to the C time-saving gaming state.

Also, even if the C time-saving game state shifts to the B time-saving game state, there is a possibility of returning to the C time-saving game state again through the 10R big role game as a so-called pull-back chance, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In addition, when the time is shortened in the B time-saving game state or the A time-saving game state, it is set to a non-time-saving game state. As described above, the non-time-saving gaming state may shift to the C time-saving gaming state by winning a specific loss. Therefore, even if the player is short of working hours, the player can continue the game thereafter, and the desire to continue the game can be enhanced.

Next, processing in the main control board 300 according to the embodiment will be described. In addition, below, the change from the said reference example is demonstrated, and description is abbreviate|omitted about another process.

FIG. 77 is a flowchart for explaining subcommand group set processing in the main control board 300 according to the embodiment. The subcommand group set process according to the embodiment is executed instead of the subcommand group set process according to the reference example. The subcommand group set process according to the embodiment differs from the above reference example in that the process of step S110-23 is executed, and the other processes are the same as those of the above reference example. Therefore, the processing of step S110-23 will be described here.

(Step S110-23)
When the state at the time of power failure is not a special symbol variation waiting state, that is, when the first special symbol display device 160 or the second special symbol display device 162 at the time of power failure is in the process of changing or stopping display of symbols. , the main CPU 300a executes a special symbol confirmation designation command setting process, and ends the subcommand group setting process. As a result, when the power is turned off during the variable display or stop display of the symbols on the first special symbol display 160 or the second special symbol display 162 and then the power is turned on again, the main control board 300 sends the sub- A special symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted to the control board 330 .

FIG. 78 is a flowchart for explaining the special symbol variation waiting process in the main control board 300 according to the embodiment. The special symbol variation waiting process according to the embodiment is executed instead of the special symbol variation waiting process according to the reference example. In the special symbol variation waiting process according to the embodiment, the process of step S613 is different from that of the reference example, and the other processes are the same as those of the reference example. Therefore, the processing of step S613 will be described here.

(Step S613)
When the big winning lottery is executed in step S611, the main CPU 300a performs special symbol determination processing for determining the type of special symbols. This special pattern pattern determination processing will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 79 is a flow chart for explaining the special symbol symbol determination process in the main control board 300 according to the embodiment.

(Step S613-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the pending type read out in the big win lottery.

(Step S613-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the type of hold is special 1 hold. As a result, if it is determined to be special 1 pending, the process moves to step S613-5, and if it is determined not to be special 1 pending, the process moves to step S613-21.

(Step S613-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the result of the big win lottery is a big win. As a result, when it is determined that it is a big hit, the process moves to step S631-7, and when it is determined that it is not a big win, the process moves to step S613-9.

(Step S613-7)
The main CPU 300a sets the special 1 per symbol random number determination table a, and shifts the process to step S613-15.

(Step S613-9)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the result of the big winning lottery is a specific loss. As a result, when it is determined to be a specific loss, the process moves to step S631-11, and when it is determined not to be a specific loss, the process moves to step S613-13.

(Step S613-11)
The main CPU 300a sets the special 1 per symbol random number determination table b, and shifts the processing to step S613-15.

(Step S613-13)
The main CPU 300a saves the special symbol X and shifts the processing to step S613-19.

(Step S613-15)
The main CPU 300a sets a special 1 winning symbol random number determination table c.

(Step S613-17)
The main CPU 300a refers to the tables set in steps S613-7, S613-11, S613-15, and steps S613-23 and S613-27, which will be described later, to determine the type of special symbol.

(Step S613-19)
The main CPU 300a sets a symbol type specifying command indicating the determined special symbol type, and terminates the special symbol determination process.

(Step S613-21)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the result of the big win lottery is a big win. As a result, when it is determined that it is a big hit, the process moves to step S631-23, and when it is determined that it is not a big win, the process moves to step S613-25.

(Step S613-23)
The main CPU 300a sets the winning symbol random number determination table a for special 2, and shifts the process to step S613-15.

(Step S613-25)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the result of the big win lottery is a small win. As a result, when it is determined to be a small hit, the process moves to step S631-27, and when it is determined not to be a small win, the process moves to step S613-29.

(Step S613-27)
The main CPU 300a sets the winning symbol random number determination table b for special 2, and shifts the process to step S613-15.

(Step S613-29)
The main CPU 300a saves the special symbol Y, and shifts the process to step S613-19.

FIG. 80 is a flow chart for explaining special symbol stop symbol display processing in the main control board 300 according to the embodiment. The special symbol stop symbol display process according to the embodiment is executed instead of the special symbol stop symbol display process according to the reference example.

(Step S630-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the special game timer set in step S620-21 is not "0". As a result, when it is determined that the timer value of the special game timer is not "0", the special symbol stop symbol display process is terminated, and when it is determined that the timer value of the special game timer is "0". The process moves to step S630-3.

(Step S630-3)
The main CPU 300a confirms the result of the big role lottery.

(Step S630-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the result of the big win lottery is a big win. As a result, if it is determined to be a big win, the process moves to step S630-19, and if it is determined not to be a big win, the process moves to step S631.

(Step S631)
The main CPU 300a executes a number cutting management process. This number cutting management process will be described later.

(Step S630-9)
The main CPU 300a updates the variation state.

(Step S630-11)
The main CPU 300a sets, in the transmission buffer, a game state confirmation designation command at the time of special symbol determination, which indicates the game state when the special symbol is determined.

(Step S630-13)
The main CPU 300a sets the counter values of the special 2 hour saving counter and the total hour saving counter updated in step S631, that is, the number command for transmitting each remaining number of times to the sub control board 330 in the transmission buffer.

(Step S630-15)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the result of the big win lottery is a small win. As a result, when it is determined that it is a small win, the process moves to step S630-18, and when it is determined that it is not a small win, the process moves to step S630-16.

(Step S630-16)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the result of the big winning lottery is a specific loss. As a result, when it is determined that it is a specific loss, the process moves to step S632, and when it is determined that it is not a specific loss, the process moves to step S630-17.

(Step S632)
The main CPU 300a performs specific lost state setting processing. This specific lost state setting process will be described in detail later.

(Step S630-17)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to "00H" and terminates the special symbol stop symbol display process. As a result, the special game management processing based on the 1 reserve is finished, and when the special 1 reserve or the special 2 reserve is stored, the processing for starting the variable display of the special symbols based on the next reserve is performed. will be

(Step S630-18)
The main CPU 300a stores (saves) the game state at the time when the small winning symbol is determined in the storage area of the main RAM 300c.

(Step S630-19)
The main CPU 300a resets (sets) the game state to the non-time-saving game state, which is the initial state.

(Step S630-21)
The main CPU 300a sets the data of the special electric accessary product operating ram set table according to the determined special symbol type.

(Step S630-23)
The main CPU 300a performs a special electric accessary product maximum number of times setting process. Specifically, referring to the data set in step S630-21, a predetermined number (counter value corresponding to the type of special symbol = number of rounds) is set as a counter value in the special electric accessory maximum operation counter. do. It should be noted that this special electric accessory maximum operation number cut counter indicates the number of rounds that can be executed in the big winning game to be started from now on. On the other hand, the main RAM 300c is provided with a special electric accessory continuous operation number cutting counter, and at the start of each round game, by adding "1" to the counter value of the special electric accessory continuous operation number cutting counter, The current round game number is managed. Here, a process of resetting (updating to "0") the counter value of the special electric role product continuous operation number cutting counter is executed together with the start of the big winning game.

(Step S630-25)
The main CPU 300a refers to the data set in step S630-21 and saves a predetermined opening time as a timer value in the special game timer.

(Step S630-27)
The main CPU 300a sets an opening designation command for transmitting the start of the big winning game or the small winning game to the sub control board 330 in the transmission buffer. This opening designation command is provided for each opening time, and here, the opening designation command corresponding to the opening time saved in step S630-25 is set in the transmission buffer.

(Step S630-29)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to "03H" if the result of the big win lottery confirmed in step S630-3 is a big win, and changes the special game management phase to "03H" if it is a small win. 07H", and terminates the special symbol stop symbol display process. As a result, a big winning game or a small winning game is started.

FIG. 81 is a flow chart for explaining the number cutting management process in the main control board 300 according to the embodiment.

(Step S631-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the game state is advantageous. As a result, when it is determined that it is in an advantageous state, the process moves to step S631-3, and when it is determined that it is not in an advantageous state, the process moves to step S631-15.

(Step S631-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the Special 2 variation has been executed. As a result, if it is determined that the special 2 variation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S631-5, and if it is determined that the special 2 variation has not been performed (the special 1 variation has been performed), step S631- Move to 7.

(Step S631-5)
The main CPU 300a decrements the counter value of the special 2 hour reduction counter.

(Step S631-7)
The main CPU 300a decrements the counter value of the total time-saving cut-off counter.

(Step S631-9)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the special 2 time saving count or the total time saving count is zero. If it is determined that the special 2 time saving number of times or the total time saving number of times is 0, the process is moved to step S631-11, and if it is determined that neither the special 2 time saving number of times nor the total time saving number of times is 0, the Terminate the number-of-times cutting management process.

(Step S631-11)
The main CPU 300a sets the game state to a non-time-saving game state. In addition, here, the counter values of the special 2 time saving number cutting counter, the total time saving number cutting counter and the normal figure fluctuation number counter are reset (to 0).

(Step S631-13)
The main CPU 300a sets a game state change designation command indicating the game state, and terminates the number-of-plays management process.

(Step S631-15)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value of the ceiling number counter is greater than zero. In addition, in this embodiment, after the big win game, if the result of the big win lottery is confirmed a predetermined number of times (for example, 656 times) without winning the big win, the game state is changed to the C time saving game state. there is The ceiling number counter is a counter that counts the remaining number of times until the ceiling function is activated and transitions to the C time saving game state. The main CPU 300a shifts the process to step S631-17 when the ceiling number counter is greater than 0, and terminates the number cutting management process when the ceiling number counter is 0.

(Step S631-17)
The main CPU 300a decrements the ceiling number counter.

(Step S631-19)
The main CPU 300a sets a ceiling number command indicating the counter value of the ceiling number counter updated in step S631-17.

(Step S631-21)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value of the ceiling number counter is zero. As a result, if it is determined that the ceiling number counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S631-23, and if it is determined that the ceiling number counter is not 0, the number cutting management process is terminated.

(Step S631-23)
The main CPU 300a sets the game state to the C time-saving game state.

(Step S631-25)
The main CPU 300a sets a game state change designation command, and terminates the number-of-plays management process.

FIG. 82 is a flow chart for explaining specific failure state setting processing in the main control board 300 according to the embodiment.

(Step S632-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the current gaming state is a non-time-saving gaming state. As a result, if it is determined that it is in the non-time-saving gaming state, the process proceeds to step S632-3, and if it is determined that it is not in the non-time-saving gaming state, the specific loss state setting process is terminated.

(Step S632-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the type of the stopped special symbol is the special symbol Xa. As a result, when it is determined that it is the special symbol Xa, the process is moved to step S632-5, and when it is determined that it is not the special symbol Xa, the process is moved to step S632-7.

(Step S632-5)
The main CPU 300a sets the game state to the C time-saving game state, sets the time-saving end condition, and ends the specific losing state setting process. Here, as the time saving end condition, a counter value of 1 is set to the special 2 time saving time cutting counter, 10 to the total time saving time cutting counter, and 100 to the normal figure fluctuation time cutting counter.

(Step S632-7)
The main CPU 300a sets the gaming state to the short-time gaming state, and terminates the specific losing state setting process.

FIG. 83 is a flowchart for explaining the big winning opening end wait process in the main control board 300 according to the embodiment. The wait process for ending the big winning opening according to the embodiment is executed instead of the waiting process for ending the big winning opening according to the reference example.

(Step S670-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the special game timer saved in step S660-7 is not "0". As a result, when it is determined that the timer value of the special game timer is not "0", the big winning opening end wait process is terminated, and when it is determined that the timer value of the special game timer is "0", step The process moves to S671.

(Step S671)
The main CPU 300a executes state setting processing for setting the game state after the end of the big win game. This state setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

(Step S670-5)
The main CPU 300a sets, in the transmission buffer, a game state change designation command for transmitting the game state and variation state set after the end of the big win game.

(Step S670-7)
The main CPU 300a sets the number of times designation command corresponding to the special 2 time saving number of times, the total time saving number of times, and the normal figure fluctuation number saved in the above step S671 in the transmission buffer.

(Step S670-9)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to "00H" and ends the big winning opening end wait process. As a result, when special 1 suspension or special 2 suspension is stored, the variable display of the special symbols is resumed.

FIG. 84 is a flowchart for explaining state setting processing in the main control board 300 according to the embodiment.

(Step S671-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the special game management phase is 06H, ie, the end of the big win game. As a result, when it is determined that the big win game is over, the process is moved to step S671-3, and when it is determined that the big win game is not over (it is the end of the small win), the process goes to step S671-7. to move.

(Step S671-3)
The main CPU 300a refers to the game state setting table and sets the game state after the big win game based on the type of the special symbols that are stopped and displayed. In addition, here, based on the set game state or the type of the special symbol that is stopped and displayed, the counter values of the special 2 hour short cut counter, the total time short cut counter and the normal figure variation counter are set. be.

(Step S671-5)
The main CPU 300a sets a predetermined value (here, 656 times) in the ceiling count counter, and terminates the state setting process.

(Step S671-7)
The main CPU 300a resets the gaming state saved in step S630-18, and terminates the state setting process. As a result, when the small win is won but the two-kind big win is not won, the game state at the time when the small win symbol is determined is set. In addition, in the present embodiment, when the time-saving gaming state is set, the special 2 time-saving number of times is always set to once as the time-saving end condition. Therefore, since the small winning is won only by special 2 variation, the fact that the small winning game is executed in the time saving game state means that the special 2 variation is executed. When the special 2 variation is executed in the time saving game state, it is set to the non-time saving game state in the above step S631-11 at the time of determination of the special symbol. In other words, when the small winning game is executed in the time-saving game state, the non-time-saving game state is stored in the above step S630-18. Therefore, when the small win is won in the time-saving game state but the small win game ends without winning the second kind of jackpot, the game state after the small win game is set to the non-time-saving game state. .

FIG. 85 is a flow chart for explaining normal symbol variation waiting processing in the main control board 300 according to the embodiment. The normal symbol variation waiting process according to the embodiment is executed instead of the normal symbol variation waiting process according to the reference example. In the normal symbol variation waiting process according to the embodiment, the processes after step S710-1, step S710-9, step S710-11, and step S710-20 are the normal symbol variation waiting process according to the above reference example. different. Therefore, here, the processing after step S710-1, step S710-9, step S710-11, and step S710-20 will be described, and the description of the other processing will be omitted.

(Step S710-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the counter value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter and determines whether the counter value is "0", that is, whether the normal pattern reserved ball number counter is "0". As a result, if it is determined that the counter value is not "0", the process moves to step S710-3, and if it is determined that the counter value is "0", the process moves to step S710-31.

(Step S710-9)
The main CPU 300a executes normal symbol variation number determination processing. Here, a normal pattern fluctuation pattern number determination table for determining the normal pattern fluctuation pattern number is provided. The normal pattern fluctuation pattern number determination table is provided for each game state and for each type of normal pattern. Here, the normal pattern variation pattern number is determined with reference to the normal pattern variation pattern number determination table corresponding to the current game state and the determined type of normal symbol. It should be noted that, in the normal pattern fluctuation pattern number, the time of the normal pattern fluctuation display in the normal pattern display 168, that is, the normal pattern fluctuation time is defined.

(Step S710-11)
The main CPU 300a sets the normal pattern variation pattern command corresponding to the normal pattern variation pattern number determined in step S710-9 above in the transmission buffer. As a result, the normal pattern variation pattern command is transmitted from the main control board 300 to the sub control board 330 at the start of the variation display of the normal symbol.

(Step S710-20)
The main CPU 300a stores the current game state as the game state at the start of normal pattern variation.

(Step S710-21)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the current gaming state is an advantageous state (A time saving game state, B time saving game state, C time saving game state). As a result, if it is determined that it is in an advantageous state, the process proceeds to step S710-23, and if it is determined that it is not in an advantageous state, the process proceeds to step S710-29.

(Step S710-23)
The main CPU 300a decrements the counter value of the normal pattern fluctuation counter.

(Step S710-25)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value updated in step S710-23 is zero. As a result, when it is determined that the counter value is 0, the process proceeds to step S710-27, and when it is determined that the counter value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S710-29.

(Step S710-27)
The main CPU 300a sets the game state to a non-time-saving game state. In addition, here, the counter values of the special 2 time saving number cutting counter, the total time saving number cutting counter and the normal figure fluctuation number counter are reset (to 0).

(Step S710-29)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "01H" and terminates the normal symbol variation waiting process.

(Step S710-31)
The main CPU 300a sets a general pattern customer waiting designation command in the transmission buffer, and ends the normal pattern variation waiting process.

FIG. 86 is a flow chart for explaining the process during normal symbol fluctuation in the main control board 300 according to the embodiment. The process during normal design fluctuation according to the embodiment is executed instead of the process during normal design fluctuation according to the reference example. It should be noted that the process during normal design fluctuation according to the embodiment, the process from step S720-1 to step S720-9 is the same as the process during normal design fluctuation according to the above reference example, and the process after step S720-11 is It is different from the process during normal design fluctuation according to the above-mentioned reference example. Therefore, the processing after step S720-11 will be explained here, and the explanation of the processing before step S720-11 will be omitted.

(Step S720-11)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the second starting port 122 is long opened. It should be noted that whether or not the second starting port 122 is long open is determined by a combination of the game state at the start of the normal pattern fluctuation and the type of the normal pattern (hit pattern) to be stopped. As a result, when it is determined that the second start port 122 is long opened, the process proceeds to step S720-15, and when it is determined that the second start port 122 is not long opened, the process proceeds to step S720-13. Move.

(Step S720-13)
The main CPU 300a normally sets a timer value corresponding to 0.4 seconds as the normal symbol fluctuation stop time in the normal game timer.

(Step S720-15)
The main CPU 300a normally sets a timer value corresponding to 5.0 seconds as the normal symbol fluctuation stop time in the normal game timer.

(Step S720-17)
The main CPU 300a sets a normal pattern stop specifying command indicating that the stop display of the normal pattern is started in the transmission buffer.

(Step S720-19)
The main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "02H" and terminates the normal symbol changing process.

FIG. 87 is a flow chart for explaining normal symbol stop symbol display processing in the main control board 300 according to the embodiment. The normal symbol stop symbol display process according to the embodiment is executed instead of the normal symbol stop symbol display process according to the reference example. In the normal symbol stop symbol display process according to the embodiment, the normal symbol stop symbol according to the reference example is that the process of step S730-10 is executed between the processes of step S730-9 and step S730-11. Unlike the display processing, other processing is the same as the above reference example. Therefore, the processing of step S730-10 will be described here, and the description of the other processing will be omitted.

(Step S730-10)
The main CPU 300a sets an electric power release designation command indicating the start of the auxiliary game in the transmission buffer.

As described above, in this embodiment, in the normal state, the game progresses by special 1 variation, and in the advantageous state, the game progresses by normal pattern variation. Therefore, in the normal state, the variation performance corresponding to the special 1 variation is executed, and in the advantageous state, the variation performance corresponding to the normal pattern variation is executed. Below, an example will be described for the variable effects in each of the normal state and the advantageous state.

FIG. 88 is a diagram explaining an example of the production mode according to the embodiment. As described above, in this embodiment, one of five game states is set on the main control board 300 during a game. In the sub control board 330, an effect mode corresponding to the game state set in the main control board 300 is set.

Incidentally, the production mode defines the aspect of the production to be executed, and the production corresponding to the production mode being set is executed. For example, during a game, a background image corresponding to the effect mode being set is displayed on the main effect display section 200a, and BGM corresponding to the effect mode is output. Therefore, the player can identify the current game state by viewing the effect corresponding to the effect mode.

Here, since five game states are provided, five production modes are provided. Specifically, in the main control board 300, when the game state is set to the non-time-saving game state, in the sub-control board 330, the effect mode is set to the chance mode. Similarly, when the game state is the short working hours game state, the short working hours game state A, the short working hours game state B, and the short working hours gaming state C, the production modes are set to normal mode, A mode, B mode, and C mode, respectively.

When the game state is the non-time-saving game state and the performance mode is the chance mode, the variation performance is executed with special 1 variation as the object. It should be noted that the execution of the variation production for the special 1 variation means that the variation production for suggesting and announcing the result of the major role lottery related to the special 1 variation is carried out. Similarly, when the gaming state is a slightly reduced gaming state and the production mode is the normal mode, the variation production is executed with special 1 variation as the target. In addition, when the game state is A reduced working hours game state, B reduced working hours game state, C reduced working hours gaming state, and the production mode is A mode, B mode, or C mode, the fluctuation production is executed for all normal figure fluctuations be done.

FIG. 89 is a diagram illustrating an example of a normal mode variation effect according to the embodiment. As described above, the normal mode is an effect mode corresponding to the slightly reduced gaming state, and in the slightly reduced gaming state, the variable production is executed with special 1 fluctuation as the target. During the normal mode, when the special 1 variation is executed, a variation performance suggesting the result of the big winning lottery is executed. During the variable production, as shown in (a) to (e) of FIG. 89, a plurality of types of production patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c are variably displayed and then stop-displayed, and finally the stop-displayed production pattern. The player is informed of the result of the big role lottery by the combination of 210a, 210b and 210c. Further, during the variable effect, as shown in FIG. 89(a), the first mini-symbol 220 and the second mini-symbol 221 are displayed in the main effect display section 200a.

The first mini symbol 220, like the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c, informs the state of the special figure fluctuation and the result of the big role lottery. For example, the first mini-symbols 220 are provided with an even-numbered symbol and an odd-numbered symbol. Even-numbered symbols are stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when a small winning symbol or a big winning symbol is stop-displayed on the first special symbol display 160 or the second special symbol display 162, an odd-numbered symbol is stop-displayed as the first mini-symbol 220. - 特許庁

In addition, while the symbols are variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 160 or the second special symbol display device 162, the first mini symbol 220 is variably displayed. Therefore, the variable display and stop display of the first mini-symbol 220 are synchronized with the variable display of the symbols on the first special symbol display 160 or the second special symbol display 162 . In the drawing, the downward arrow of the first mini-symbol 220 indicates that the first mini-symbol 220 is being variably displayed.

In this embodiment, the first mini-symbol 220 is shared by the special 1 variation and the special 2 variation. Therefore, the first mini-symbol 220 is displayed at the same location during execution of the special 1 variation and during execution of the special 2 variation. As a result, the display range becomes more limited than when mini symbols corresponding to the special 1 variation and the special 2 variation are displayed, and the visibility of the image for effect displayed on the main effect display section 200a is improved. is less likely to be disturbed. However, different mini symbols may be provided for each of the special 1 variation and the special 2 variation.

In addition, the second mini-symbol 221 informs the state of the normal pattern fluctuation and the result of the normal pattern lottery. For example, the second mini-symbols 221 are provided with a plurality of symbols such as circles, and symbols corresponding to the types of normal symbols stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display 168 are stopped and displayed. It should be noted that while the symbols are being varied and displayed on the normal symbol display 168, the second mini symbols 221 are displayed blinking.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, in the present embodiment as well, as in the above reference example of effect, a non-reach variation pattern and a reach variation pattern are provided as execution patterns of the variation effect. In addition, various advance notice effects are executed during the variable effect. The reliability of the jackpot is suggested by the execution pattern of the advance notice effect and the reach development effect. In addition, in the variation performance targeting the special 1 variation, the combination patterns of the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c that are finally stopped and displayed are roughly classified into a big win pattern, a losing pattern, and a special pattern.

The jackpot pattern is a pattern in which the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are stopped and displayed with the same symbols, and the losing pattern is a stop display pattern in which at least one of the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c is different from the other two. is. In addition, the production patterns 210a, 210b, and 210c are provided with 9 types of normal patterns with numbers 1 to 9, respectively, and only the normal patterns are variably displayed or stopped during the normal mode. On the other hand, during the chance mode, the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c which are variably displayed and stop-displayed include special symbols in addition to normal symbols. The special pattern is a combination pattern in which all of the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c that are finally stopped and displayed are special symbols.

FIG. 90 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation effect in the chance mode according to the embodiment. Although not shown in FIG. 90, during the chance mode, a background image different from that during the normal mode is displayed on the main effect display section 200a. During the chance mode (during the non-time-saving game state), when a specific loss is won and a special symbol Xa is determined, a special variation performance is executed. In the special variation effect, the combination pattern of the effect symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c finally stop-displayed becomes the special pattern.

Specifically, when the special variable effect is started, variable display of effect symbols 210a, 210b and 210c and variable display of the first mini symbol 220 are started as shown in FIG. 90(a). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 90(b), performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are temporarily stopped and displayed. At this time, the combination pattern that is temporarily stopped and displayed is a missing pattern, and during the temporary stop display, the three performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c slightly sway. In this state, the variable display of the first mini-symbol 220 continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 90(c), the production designs 210a, 210b and 210c are rotated by 180 degrees, and the back sides of the production designs 210a, 210b and 210c are displayed. At this time, the effect symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are displayed with the letter "C" suggesting the C time-saving gaming state. Then, as shown in FIG. 90(d), the performance symbols 210a, 210b, 210c are stop-displayed, and the first mini-symbol 220 is stop-displayed with a predetermined odd number, and the special variation performance ends.

Thus, when the special symbol Xa, which is a specific losing symbol, is won in the non-time-saving game state, and the special symbol Xa is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 160, the game state changes from the non-time-saving game state to the C time-saving game. transition to state. When shifting to the C time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. 90(e), a right-handed informing effect is executed to prompt the player to hit right.

Next, a variation effect in an advantageous state will be described. As described above, in the advantageous state, the variation effect corresponding to the normal pattern variation is executed. In other words, in an advantageous state, a variable effect is executed based on the results of the normal drawing lottery. In addition, in this embodiment, as the advantageous state, the time saving game state A, the time saving game state B, and the time saving game state C are provided.

FIG. 91 is a diagram illustrating an example of a B-mode variation effect according to the embodiment. During the B mode, as shown in FIG. 91(a), the remaining number of normal pattern fluctuations is displayed until the B time-saving game state ends. Also, during the advantageous state, similarly to during the normal state, in the variable effect, the variable display and stop display of the effect symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are performed, and finally the stop-displayed effect symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are displayed. The combination pattern informs the player of the result of the normal drawing lottery. Combination patterns of the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c that are stop-displayed during the advantageous state are broadly classified into big win patterns and losing patterns.

The jackpot pattern in the advantageous state is one in which the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are stop-displayed with the same symbols, suggesting and notifying that the long opening of the second starting port 122 has been won. Also, the losing pattern in the advantageous state is one in which at least one of the performance symbols 210a, 210b, 210c is stopped and displayed with a different symbol from the other two, indicating that the short opening of the second starting port 122 has been won. Suggest and inform.

For example, as shown in FIG. 91(a), it is assumed that normal pattern variation is started in a state in which production symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are stop-displayed in a losing pattern. In this case, as shown in FIG. 91(b), performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c are variably displayed, and the second mini-symbol 221 is variably displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 91(c), the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c and the second mini-symbol 221 are stopped and displayed.

Here, the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c have different display modes during the normal state and during the advantageous state, but the performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c may be common in all game states. can be different. In addition, the fluctuation production for normal figure fluctuation is also provided with a no-reach fluctuation pattern and a reach fluctuation pattern, similar to the fluctuation production for special 1 fluctuation, and the reliability of winning the long opening of the second start port 122 degree is suggested.

Here, when the long opening of the second starting port 122 is won in an advantageous state and the game ball enters the second starting port 122, a big win or a small win is always won. When a small win is won, if the game ball is properly shot, the game ball enters a specific area 140b in the second big winning hole 128, and the second kind of big win is won.

Therefore, as described above, it can be said that winning the long opening of the second starting port 122 in an advantageous state is equivalent to winning a jackpot. However, if the player stops shooting the game ball after winning the long opening of the second start hole 122, the game ball cannot enter the second start hole 122. - 特許庁Also, when the game ball enters the second starting port 122, special 2 variation is executed. When a small hit is won in this special 2 variation, a small hit game is executed, but if the shooting of the game ball is stopped during this small hit game, the game ball can enter the specific area 140b. However, it is not possible to win the second type jackpot.

As described above, since the period during which the game ball should flow down to the predetermined position is limited, the player is disadvantaged unless the player is properly grasped for the period. Therefore, in the embodiment, the player is prevented from being disadvantaged by executing the operation instruction effect as follows.

FIG. 92 is a diagram illustrating an example of an operation instruction rendering according to the embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 92(a) and 92(b), when the variation effect is started with the start of the normal pattern variation, the variation display of the effect symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c is started, and the second mini symbol is displayed. 221 variable display is started. Then, when the long opening of the second starting port 122 is won, as shown in FIG. 92(c), the performance symbols 210a, 210b, 210c are stopped and displayed with the same symbols. Further, when the normal symbol is stop-displayed on the normal symbol display 168, the second mini-symbol 221 is stop-displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 92(d), a right-handed instruction image 240 is displayed on the main effect display section 200a. This right-handed instruction image 240 is an image that prompts the game ball to enter the second start hole 122 . While the right-handed instruction image 240 is being displayed, a voice message such as "Please hit right-handed" is output. Further, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the right-handed instruction image 240 was displayed, a notification image 242 is displayed as shown in FIG. 92(e).

The notification image 242 is an image in which the position of the second starting hole 122 to which the game ball is to enter is conspicuously displayed on the board surface of the game board 108 . In the notification image 242, as shown in FIGS. 92(e) and 92(f), the time until the second opening 122 is opened is counted down.

Even after the second starting port 122 is opened, the display of the right-handed instruction image 240 and the notification image 242 continues, as shown in FIG. 92(g). Here, in the notification image 242, the time until the second starting port 122 is opened is counted down. For example, after the second starting port 122 is opened, the opening of the second starting port 122 ends. The remaining time to is displayed. In any case, the notification image 242 may be an image related to the open period of the second starting port 122 . Therefore, here, in the notification image 242, the time until the second start port 122 is opened is displayed numerically. good.

After that, when the game ball enters the second starting port 122, the re-variation effect is executed. In the re-fluctuation effect, as shown in FIG. 92(h), the effect patterns 210a, 210b, 210c are displayed again in a variable manner, and as shown in FIG. , 210c are statically displayed.

Here, in the re-variation effect, if a small win is won by the special 2 fluctuation and the special pattern b is determined as the small winning pattern, or if a big win is won by the special 2 fluctuation and the special pattern D is selected as the big winning pattern When determined, performance symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c with the number 7 are stop-displayed. On the other hand, if a small win is won by special 2 variation and a special symbol a is determined as a small winning symbol, or if a big win is won and a special symbol C is determined as a big winning symbol, numbers other than 7 Effect symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c marked with are stopped and displayed.

As described above, when the special symbols a and C are won, the 3R big win game is executed, and when the special symbols b and D are won, the 10R big win game is executed. Therefore, in the re-variation effect, it can be said that the stop-displayed effect symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c suggest the number of round games in the big role game. After that, as shown in FIG. 92(j), a direction instruction image 244 inscribed with "Right shot" is displayed, and the right shot is also urged by voice.

As described above, in the embodiment, the right-hand hitting instruction image 240, the notification image 242, and the direction instruction image 244 are displayed as the operation instruction effect. The timing at which the right-throwing instruction image 240, the notification image 242, and the direction instruction image 244 are displayed in the operation instruction rendering will be described in detail below.

FIG. 93 is a time chart of the operation instruction rendering according to the embodiment. As shown in FIG. 93(a), it is assumed that the normal symbol A is stopped and displayed in the normal symbol display device 168 after the symbol variation display is executed for a predetermined variation time. The normal symbol fluctuation stop time when the normal symbol A is won, that is, the fixed time is 5 seconds (see S720-15). After the fixed time has elapsed, an auxiliary game in which the second starting port 122 is opened is executed. In this auxiliary game, the time before opening the electric power corresponding to the opening time is set to 3 seconds, and then, as shown in FIG. 93(b), the second starting port 122 is opened twice for 2.9 seconds .

Then, when the game ball enters the second starting port 122 which is open, as shown in FIG. 93(c), the second special symbol display 162 executes a symbol variation display, and a predetermined variation time elapses. Then, the special symbol is stopped and displayed. The time during which the special symbol is stopped and displayed, that is, the fixed time is 0.5 seconds. Here, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the small winning game is started with the elapse of the fixed time. In this small winning game, as shown in FIG. 93(d), an opening time is set, after which opening and closing of the second big winning opening 128 are repeated.

As described above, when the normal game and the special game are executed, as shown in FIG. 93(e), the display of the right hitting instruction image 240 is started at the timing when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 93(f), the display of the notification image 242 is started during the stop display of the normal symbols. Here, the display of the notification image 242 starts at a timing after a predetermined time (for example, four seconds) has passed since the opening of the second opening 122 was started. The right-handed instruction image 240 and the notification image 242 are displayed until the game ball enters the second starting hole 122 . In other words, when the game ball enters the second starting hole 122, the right-handed instruction image 240 and the notification image 242 are hidden.

In addition, while the second special symbol display 162 is displaying the symbols in a variable manner, the direction indication image 244 starts to be displayed as shown in FIG. 93(g). Here, the direction indication image 244 is started to be displayed after a predetermined time has passed from the timing when the second big winning opening 128 is first opened in the small winning game.

It should be noted that, when the jackpot is won by the special 2 variation, the big win game is started without going through the small win game. In this case, the direction indication image 244 may not be displayed. Further, for example, when a small winning game is executed, the direction instruction image 244 may be continuously displayed until the game ball enters the specific area 140b.

In this way, in the operation instruction presentation, the right-handed instruction image 240, the notification image 242, and the direction instruction image 244, which suggest an appropriate shooting operation of the game ball, are displayed step by step, thereby causing a disadvantage to the player. Fear is reduced. Note that the display contents of the right-hand shot instruction image 240, the notification image 242, and the direction instruction image 244 in the embodiment are not particularly limited, and can be changed in design as appropriate.

Here, during the game, even if the player appropriately performs the shooting operation, the game ball may enter an unintended area. For example, in an advantageous state, hitting to the right is required, but even if the player is hitting to the right properly, a game ball that collides with a nail or the like may enter the first game area 116a. There is also Since the special 1 fluctuation and the normal pattern fluctuation can be executed in parallel, when the game ball that has entered the first game area 116a during the advantageous state enters the first start port 120, it is executed in parallel with the normal pattern fluctuation. 1 variation can be performed. At this time, if the variation time related to the special 1 variation is long, the player may be disadvantaged.

FIG. 94 is a time chart of the final change of the advantageous state according to the comparative example. In the advantageous state, the number of normal pattern fluctuations is set as a time saving end condition, and when the number of normal pattern fluctuations reaches a specified number in each advantageous state, the game state shifts to a non-time saving game state. In the embodiment, 70 times, 50 times, 100 times normal figure fluctuation frequency is set as the time saving end conditions in each of the A time saving game state, B time saving game state, and C time saving game state.

Therefore, the normal pattern fluctuations of the 70th, 50th, and 100th times in the A reduced working hours game state, B reduced working hours game state, and C reduced working hours game state are the final normalized fluctuations, respectively. As shown in FIG. 94(a), assume that the final normal/universal pattern fluctuation is started in an advantageous state. In this case, as shown in FIG. 94(c), at the start of the final normal figure fluctuation, the game state shifts to a non-time-saving game state. That is, during the final normal figure fluctuation, the game state has already been set to the non-time-saving game state.

In addition, temporarily, when the long opening of the second starting port 122 is elected in the final normal pattern fluctuation, as shown in FIG. be. The long opening of the second starting port 122 is executed during the non-time-saving gaming state, but even in this case, if the game ball enters the second starting port 122, it will always be a big hit or A small win is won, and after a 3R big win game or a 10R big win game, the game state is again set to an advantageous state.

Here, if a game ball enters the first starting hole 120 during the final normal pattern fluctuation, special 1 fluctuation is started as shown in FIG. 94(d). At the start of this special 1 variation, the game state is set to a non-time-saving game state. In the comparative example, during the non-time-saving gaming state, it is configured such that the reach variation pattern variation effect is executed with a predetermined probability, and a long variation time corresponding to the reach variation pattern can be selected. If a long variation time is selected, as shown in (b) and (d) of FIG. 94, the long opening of the second starting port 122 and the special 1 variation may be executed in parallel. .

In the comparative example, as in the present embodiment, the Special 2 variation is executed with priority over the Special 1 variation, and the Special 1 variation and the Special 2 variation are not executed in parallel. do not have. That is, the special 1 variation and the special 2 variation are selectively executed. In addition, the maximum number of stored special 2 reservations is zero. Therefore, when the special 1 variation is executed during the long opening of the second starting port 122, even if the game ball enters the second starting port 122, as shown in FIG. The change will not work. As a result, due to the final normal pattern fluctuation, despite winning the long opening of the second start port 122, as shown in (f) of FIG. There is a risk that the person will be disadvantaged.

In addition, here, the case where the special 1 fluctuation is started during the final normal pattern fluctuation was explained, but for example, if the fluctuation time of the special 1 fluctuation in the advantageous state is set for a long time, for the same reason as above , Special 2 variation execution opportunity is deprived. For example, it is assumed that the long opening of the second starting port 122 is elected immediately after the advantageous state is set. Also, at this time, the special 1 fluctuation is started during the normal pattern fluctuation, and the fluctuation time of the special 1 fluctuation is long. In this case, since the long opening of the second starting port 122 is executed in parallel with the Special 1 variation, the opportunity to execute the Special 2 variation is also deprived.

FIG. 95 is a diagram explaining the relationship between the game state and the variation time according to the embodiment. The target of the variable performance in the non-time-saving gaming state and the slight time-saving gaming state, that is, the actual variation target for advancing the game is the special 1 variation. In the non-time-saving gaming state, the fluctuation time is determined based on the number of special 1 fluctuations after being set in the non-time-saving gaming state and the number of special 1 reservations. Specifically, after being set to the non-time-saving gaming state, in the first and second special 1 fluctuations, the fluctuation time is determined to be 1 second regardless of the number of special 1 reservations.

In addition, after being set to the non-time-saving gaming state, in the special 1 fluctuation after the third time, a different fluctuation time is determined by the special 1 suspension. Specifically, if the number of special 1 reservations is 0 or 1, a variable time of 12 seconds or more is determined, and if the number of special 1 reservations is 2, a variable time of 8 seconds or more is determined, Special 1 reservation If the number is 3, a variation time of 4 seconds or more is determined. In other words, the shortest variation time of special 1 fluctuation after the third time in the non-time-saving gaming state is 12 seconds when the number of special 1 reservations is 0 or 1, 8 seconds when the number of special 1 reservations is 2, and the number of special 1 reservations is 3, it is 4 seconds.

In addition, in the short time gaming state, the shortest variation time is set for each special 1 reservation number regardless of the number of special 1 fluctuations. In addition, the shortest variation time for each special 1 reservation number in the small time saving gaming state is the same as the shortest variation time for each special 1 reservation number of the special 1 fluctuation after the third time in the non-time saving gaming state. In this embodiment, in the non-time-saving gaming state and the slight time-saving gaming state, the larger the number of special 1 reservations, the shorter the shortest variation time.

In addition, in the non-time-saving game state and the minute time-saving game state, the variation time of the special 2 variation is set to 5 seconds, and the variation time of the normal figure variation is set to 30 seconds.

On the other hand, A reduced working hours gaming state, B reduced working hours gaming state, the actual fluctuation target in the reduced working hours gaming state C normal figure fluctuation. Here, in the A time-saving gaming state, B time-saving gaming state, and C time-saving gaming state, the shortest variation time of the normal pattern variation, which is the subject of real variation, is common, but the shortest variation time is different in each advantageous state good too.

From the first normal pattern fluctuation in each advantageous state to the normal pattern fluctuation one time before the final normal pattern fluctuation, the shortest fluctuation time is determined for each normal pattern reservation number. Here, when the number of normal pattern reservations is 0 or 1, the shortest fluctuation time of normal pattern fluctuations is set to 6 seconds, and when the number of normal pattern reservations is 2, the shortest fluctuation time of normal pattern fluctuations is set to 4 seconds. It is set, and when the number of normal pattern reservations is 3, the shortest fluctuation time of normal pattern fluctuation is set to 2 seconds. On the other hand, in the final normal pattern fluctuation, regardless of the normal pattern pending number, the fluctuation time is determined to be 10 seconds. In the advantageous state, the variation time of the Special 1 variation is set to 1 second, and the variation time of the Special 2 variation is set to 5 seconds.

FIG. 96 is a time chart of the final variation of the advantageous state according to the example. As shown in (a) of FIG. 96, assume that the final normal/universal pattern fluctuation is started in an advantageous state. In this case, as shown in FIG. 96 (c), at the start of the final normal figure fluctuation, the game state shifts to a non-time-saving game state. That is, during the final normal figure fluctuation, the game state has already been set to the non-time-saving game state. And, when winning the long opening of the second starting port 122 in the final normal pattern fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 96 (b), the second starting port 122 is opened 2.9 seconds × 2 times.

Here, if a game ball enters the first starting hole 120 during the final normal pattern fluctuation, special 1 fluctuation is started as shown in FIG. 96(d). At the start of this special 1 variation, the game state is set to the non-time-saving gaming state, but in the embodiment, the variation time of the first special 1 variation in the non-time-saving gaming state is always determined to be 1 second. Therefore, the special 1 variation that started during the final normal pattern variation ends at the latest during the determination time (5 seconds) of the normal pattern.

In this embodiment, the fluctuation time (1 second) of the first and second special 1 fluctuations in the non-time-saving gaming state is shorter than the time from the start to the end of the auxiliary game (opening to ending), and further, the second 2 Shorter than the time from the start to end of the long opening of the starting port 122. Therefore, even if the special 1 fluctuation is started immediately before the opening of the second start port 122 starts, the second start port 122 remains open until after the fixed time of the special 1 fluctuation has passed. .

As a result, after the start of the final normal pattern fluctuation, even if the special 1 fluctuation is executed twice before the long opening of the second start port 122 is started, the player can execute the special 2 fluctuation Opportunities can be obtained.

As described above, according to this embodiment, the game board 108 is provided with the game area 116 provided with the first start port 120 and the start port including the second start port 122 that can be opened and closed, and the predetermined condition is established, the auxiliary game (long open) in which the opening and closing of the second starting port 122 is controlled in a specific manner in which the game ball can enter is executed.

Further, based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port, one of a plurality of types of symbols (special symbols) including a predetermined winning symbol (small winning symbol) is determined, and the symbol is displayed on the symbol display unit (first The process of measuring the fluctuation time until the special symbol display device 160 and the second special symbol display device 162) are displayed, and the process of displaying the pattern on the pattern display unit when the fluctuation time has passed are performed. is executed, and based on the display of the predetermined winning pattern on the pattern display unit, the opening and closing of the big winning opening provided in the game area is controlled to perform the first big winning opening opening/closing game (small winning game). is executed, and based on the fact that the game ball entering the large winning opening enters a predetermined specific area (specific area 140b) during the first large winning opening opening/closing game, the opening and closing of the large winning opening is controlled to control the opening and closing of the large winning opening. 2 big winning opening opening and closing game (large winning game) is executed.

Also, one of a plurality of states including a first state (normal state) and a second state (advantageous state) in which the auxiliary game is more likely to be executed than the first state is set, and the second state is set. When the preset state change condition (time saving end condition) is established in the state of (1), the state is changed to the first state.

Further, after the second state is changed to the first state, the opening and closing of the second starting port 122 may be controlled in a specific manner. In addition, variation processing (special 1 variation) executed based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 120, and variation processing executed based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 122 (Special 2 variation) can be selected and executed.

After the second state is changed to the first state, a game ball enters the first start port 120 during a predetermined period in which the number of symbol decisions is within a predetermined number of times (two times). When the pattern is determined based on the ball, a time shorter than the time from the start to the end of the auxiliary game in which the opening and closing of the second starting port 122 is controlled in a specific mode can be determined as the variable time.

According to the above configuration, according to the present embodiment, when the long opening of the second start port 122 is elected in the final normal pattern fluctuation, the special 1 fluctuation is executed, and the special 2 fluctuation becomes unexecutable. It is possible to reduce the possibility of a situation occurring. Also, during the advantageous state, the variation time of the special 1 variation is set to 1 second, so if the long opening of the second start port 122 is won during the advantageous state, the special 1 variation is started. Even if it does, the possibility that the Special 2 variation becomes unexecutable is reduced in the same manner as described above. As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to secure an opportunity to execute the Special 2 variation, and reduce the possibility that the player will be disadvantaged.

Here, at the end of the advantageous state, a result effect is executed to suggest and notify the game result from the so-called initial win to the end of the consecutive games.

FIG. 97 is a diagram explaining an example of a result effect according to the embodiment. In the time-saving game state, if you do not win the jackpot (including two types of jackpots) within the range of the number of normal pattern fluctuations set as the time-saving end condition, as described above, at the start of the final normal pattern fluctuation, the game state is It shifts to a non-time-saving game state. In this case, even if the game state is changed, during the final normal pattern fluctuation, the variation production targeting the normal pattern fluctuation is executed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 97(a), when the normal pattern fluctuation starts, the remaining number of normal pattern fluctuations is displayed as 0, and the production patterns 210a, 210b, 210c and the second mini pattern 221 are displayed. starts fluctuating display. After that, when the normal symbols are stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display 168, as shown in FIG. 97(b), production symbols 210a, 210b and 210c are stopped and displayed in the losing pattern, and the second mini symbol 221 is displayed. Stop is displayed.

At this time, if the game is appropriately played, special 1 suspension is not stored, so the state shifts to a customer waiting state (both customers waiting state described later) with the end of the normal pattern fluctuation. In the customer waiting state (both customers waiting state described later), as shown in FIG. 97(c), a result effect is executed. The result production notifies the player of the game result in the continuous state, and here, the current production mode ends (in the figure, 〇〇 is the name of the production mode to end), and the game As a result, the number of jackpots in the continuous state (BONUS x 5 times in the figure), the number of 10R big role games in the continuous house state (BIG x 4 times in the figure), the number of 3R big role games (REG x 1 in the figure) times), and the total number of prize balls obtained in the continuous state (TOTAL: 6250 in the figure) are displayed. That is, in the result effect, a result display screen based on the game results during the predetermined period (Renso) is displayed.

Further, in the result effect, when the game result is displayed for a predetermined time, a left-handed hitting suggestion image is displayed as shown in FIG. 97(d). Along with the display of this left-handed suggestive image, a voice saying "Please hit left" is output during the result production.

In the above-mentioned result performance, a performance end condition is set, and when the performance end condition is met, the result performance ends and the performance mode shifts to a chance mode corresponding to the non-time-saving game state. Here, two conditions are provided as conditions for ending the effect of the result effect: 30 seconds have passed since the start of the result effect, and special 1 variation is executed. When either of these two conditions is satisfied, the background image for the chance mode is displayed on the main effect display section 200a. For example, when the special 1 variation is executed, the background image for the chance mode is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 97(e), the variation effect for the special 1 variation is started.

FIG. 98 is a time chart of result effects according to the example. As shown in FIG. 98 (a), when the final normal pattern fluctuation in the advantageous state is executed, as shown in FIG. is executed. At this time, the game state is set to a non-time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. 98(d). However, during the final normal pattern fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 98(e), the production mode before the start of the final normal pattern fluctuation, that is, the production mode corresponding to the advantageous state is maintained.

Then, when the result of the final normal pattern fluctuation is short opening of the second starting port 122, the second starting port 122 is opened for 0.05 seconds as shown in FIG. 98(b). In addition, as described above, the game ball does not enter the second starting port 122 during the opening of the short circuit. Also, in the final normal/universal pattern fluctuation, when the fixed time elapses, as shown in (g) of FIG. 98, the result effect is started.

During the result production, as shown in FIG. 98(c), when a game ball enters the first start hole 120, special 1 variation is executed. At this time, the variation time of the special 1 variation is 1 second as described above. When the special 1 variation is executed, as shown in FIG. 98(g), the result production ends at that time, and the production mode shifts to the chance mode as shown in FIG. 98(e). Further, as shown in (h) of FIG. 98, with the start of the special 1 variation, a variation performance (special figure variation performance) targeting the special 1 variation is executed.

Here, the special 1 variation is started during the result presentation, and the result presentation ends with the start of the special 1 variation. If the Special 1 variation does not start during the result effect, the result effect ends 30 seconds after the start, as indicated by the dashed line in FIG. 98(g). In other words, although the result effect is executed for 30 seconds at maximum, the execution time is shortened by executing the special 1 variation.

With the above configuration, for example, a player who wants to slowly check the result effect or take a picture can continue the result effect for 30 seconds by stopping the shooting of the game ball. On the other hand, the player who wants to end the result effect can shorten the result effect and restart the game by shooting the game ball.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to reliably inform the player of the change in the game state, that is, the change in the shooting operation, through the result effect, and furthermore, the result effect can be performed by the player's operation. can be shortened. As a result, it is possible to resume the game early while reducing the possibility of the player performing an erroneous operation and being disadvantaged, thereby increasing the willingness to continue the game.

It should be noted that, here, the case where 30 seconds have elapsed and the execution of the special 1 variation is provided as the condition for ending the effect of the result effect has been described. However, the condition for ending the effect of the result effect is not limited to this. For example, the result effect may end when the effect button 208 is operated. In any case, it is preferable that the result effect is shortened when the preset effect end condition is established, and the effect end condition is not particularly limited.

Here, in the advantageous state, as described above, three of the special 2 time saving number of times, the total time saving number of times and the normal figure fluctuation number of times are provided as time saving end conditions. The number of normal pattern fluctuations is a time saving end condition that is established when the game is properly performed, and when the game is properly performed, as described above, the result production is executed after the final normal pattern fluctuation. be done. On the other hand, in an advantageous state, an irregular situation may occur, such as the number of special 2 time reductions or the total number of time reductions reaching a specified number. When the advantageous state ends due to the occurrence of an irregular situation, the following effect is executed.

FIG. 99 is a diagram illustrating an example of a state change suggestion effect according to the embodiment. For example, as shown in FIG. 99(a), it is assumed that the regular pattern variation effect is being executed during the advantageous state. In this state, when a game ball enters the first starting port 120, special 1 variation is executed. Suppose that the total number of time reductions reaches 10 times due to the special 1 variation executed at this time. When the total number of times of time saving reaches 10 times in an advantageous state, the game state is set to a non-time saving game state assuming that the time saving end condition is established when special symbols are decided.

In this case, with the start of the tenth symbol variation display in the advantageous state, the state change suggesting effect is executed. In the state change suggesting effect, a shutter image 250 is displayed as shown in FIG. 99(b). As shown in FIGS. 99(b) and 99(c), the shutter image 250 is divided into two parts in the width direction of the main effect display section 200a. Is displayed.

The main effect display section 200a is configured by stacking a plurality of layers in which images are displayed. A priority is set for each layer, and when images are displayed simultaneously on both a relatively high-priority layer and a relatively low-priority layer, in the range where the image display areas overlap, An image displayed in a layer with a high priority is displayed in the main effect display section 200a so as to be visible.

A background image provided for each effect mode is displayed on the first layer with the lowest priority, and the effect patterns 210a, 210b, 210c are displayed on the second layer with a higher priority than the first layer. Then, the shutter image 250 is displayed on the third layer, which has a higher priority than the second layer. Therefore, when the state change suggestion effect is executed, the shutter image 250 is displayed on the front side of the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c, and the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c and the background image become invisible.

Also, the first mini-symbol 220 and the second mini-symbol 221 are displayed on a fourth layer having a higher priority than the third layer on which the shutter image 250 is displayed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 99(c), even when the shutter image 250 is displayed, the first mini-symbol 220 and the second mini-symbol 221 allow the player to see the execution status of the special-symbol variation and normal-symbol variation. can grasp.

The state change suggestion effect described above continues until the Special 1 variation ends. Therefore, when the general pattern variation ends during the special 1 variation, the second mini-symbol 221 is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 99(c). The display and the display of the shutter image 250 continue.

Then, when the special symbol is stop-displayed on the first special symbol display 160, the first mini-symbol 220 is stop-displayed as shown in FIG. 99(d). After that, when the fixed time elapses, a state of waiting for customers (a state of waiting for both customers to be described later) is entered, and a result effect is started as shown in FIG. 99(e).

FIG. 100 is a time chart of the result rendering during irregularity according to the embodiment. As shown in (a) of FIG. 100, it is assumed that the normal pattern variation is being executed. In this normal pattern fluctuation, when the short opening of the second starting port 122 is won, as shown in FIG. The mouth 122 is shorted open.

Then, as shown in (c) of FIG. 100, when a game ball enters the first starting port 120 during normal pattern variation, special 1 variation is executed. When this special 1 variation is the 10th special 1 variation in the advantageous state, as shown in (d) of FIG. do.

Also, as shown in (e) of FIG. 100, during the normal pattern fluctuation, the normal pattern fluctuation production is executed, but with the start of the special 1 fluctuation, the normal pattern fluctuation production ends, and (f ), the state change suggesting effect is started. The state change suggesting effect continues until the definite time of special 1 variation has elapsed. Then, as the determined time elapses and the state shifts to a customer waiting state (both customers waiting state described later), a result effect is executed as shown in FIG. 100(g).

Here, when the advantageous state ends when an irregular situation occurs such that the total number of times of shortening time reaches 10 times, and when the advantageous state ends when the number of normal pattern fluctuations reaches the specified number of times is executed. That is, in the present embodiment, a plurality of conditions for ending the advantageous state, that is, time-saving end conditions are provided, and the same result performance is executed even when any of the time-saving end conditions are met.

Moreover, the effect end condition of the result effect is common regardless of the established time saving end condition. Therefore, even in the case shown in FIG. 100, when 30 seconds have passed since the start of the result effect or when the special 1 variation is executed, the result effect ends and the background image for the chance mode is displayed as the main effect. displayed on the part 200a. Therefore, as shown in (h) of FIG. 100, when the special 1 variation is executed during the result production, the background image for the chance mode is displayed, and the special figure variation for the special 1 variation is displayed. The performance will start.

In addition, here, when the number of normal pattern fluctuations reaches the specified number of times, and when the total number of time reductions reaches the specified number of times, the same result production is executed. However, part of the result production may differ depending on the established time saving end condition. Also, the content of the result presentation is not limited to the content described above, and the design can be changed as appropriate.

Also, here, regardless of the established time saving end condition, the result performance is terminated when the special 1 variation is executed or 30 seconds have passed since the start of the result performance. However, the condition for ending the result production may differ depending on the established time saving end condition.

In any case, the game is played in one of a plurality of states including a first state (normal state) and a second state (advantageous state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first state. is progressing, the game is progressed according to the progress conditions provided for each state, and in the second state, the preset first end condition (the number of normal pattern fluctuations reaches the specified number) , Or, if the second end condition different from the first end condition (the total number of time reductions reaches the specified number of times) is satisfied, the second state is ended, and with the end of the second state, a predetermined period It is preferable to execute a predetermined effect (result effect) in which a result display screen is displayed based on the game result during (continuous game).

At least a part of the result display screen is common between when the first end condition is met and when the second end condition is met. Moreover, the display time is shortened by satisfying the preset display end condition (the start of the special 1 variation). The display end condition is a common display end condition applicable to both when the first end condition is satisfied and when the second end condition is satisfied (start of special 1 fluctuation, elapse of 30 seconds). should be included.

Here, it is assumed that completely the same display termination condition is provided for the case where the first termination condition is satisfied and the case where the second termination condition is satisfied. should be common. By sharing at least part of the display end conditions in this way, even if an irregular situation occurs and the result effect is executed, the player can easily restart the game. It is possible to suppress the decrease in desire to continue playing.

As described above, in this embodiment, the occurrence of an irregular situation may cause the transition from the advantageous state to the normal state. There is also the possibility of transitioning to an advantageous situation from

FIG. 101 is a diagram illustrating an example of a state change suggesting effect during an irregular state according to the embodiment. As shown in FIG. 101(a), it is assumed that special 1 fluctuation is started during execution of the final normal pattern fluctuation. At this time, at the start of the final normal pattern fluctuation, although the game state has shifted from the advantageous state to the normal state, during the final normal pattern fluctuation, the target of the fluctuation performance is set to the normal pattern fluctuation. Therefore, if the total time saving number of times does not reach the specified number of times and the result of the big role lottery related to the special 1 fluctuation is lost, only the fluctuation display and the stop display of the first mini pattern 220 are performed, and the special figure fluctuation production is never executed.

Here, in an advantageous state, even if a specific loser is won, the game state does not shift. However, during the final normal figure fluctuation, the game state is set to a non-time-saving game state. Therefore, when the special 1 variation is executed during the final normal pattern variation and the special symbol Xa is won, the game state is set to the C time saving game state after the special symbol is determined.

In this case, along with the start of the special 1 variation, as shown in FIGS. 101(b) and 101(c), the state change suggesting effect is executed and the shutter image 250 is displayed. The state change suggestion effect executed at this time is the same as the effect executed when an irregular situation occurs and the advantageous state ends, as shown in FIG.

Then, when the special symbol is stop-displayed on the first special symbol display 160, the first mini-symbol 220 is stop-displayed as shown in FIG. 101(d). After that, when the fixed time elapses, the C time-saving game state is set again, and the right-handed informing effect is executed along with the change of the game state.

FIG. 102 is a time chart of the state change suggestion effect at the time of irregularity according to the embodiment. As shown in (a) of FIG. 102, assume that the final normal/universal pattern fluctuation is executed in an advantageous state. Moreover, in this final normal figure fluctuation, as shown in (b) of FIG. In this case, as shown in (d) of FIG. 102, the game state shifts from the advantageous state to the non-time-saving game state with the start of the final normal figure fluctuation.

During the final normal pattern fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 102 (e), it is set to the production mode corresponding to the advantageous state, and as shown in FIG. Normal figure fluctuation production is executed. Under such circumstances, as shown in (c) of FIG. 102, during the final normal figure fluctuation, when the game ball enters the first starting port 120, special 1 fluctuation is started.

At this time, in the special 1 variation, when the specific loss is won and the special symbol Xa is determined, as shown in (d) of FIG. Time saving game state) is set. In this case, along with the start of the special 1 variation, a state change suggesting effect is executed as shown in (g) of FIG. By the start of the state change suggesting effect, as shown in (f) of FIG. 102, the normal pattern fluctuation effect is interrupted.

After that, as shown in FIG. 102 (a), after resetting the advantageous state, when the first normal pattern fluctuation is executed, as shown in FIG. 102 (g), with the start of the normal pattern fluctuation , the state change suggesting effect ends. Also, at this time, as shown in (e) of FIG. 102, the production mode becomes the C mode, and as shown in (f) of FIG. 102, the normal pattern fluctuation production is executed. In this case, the state change suggesting effect ends with the start of the normal pattern fluctuation effect, but the state change suggesting effect may end after a predetermined time elapses, for example.

According to this embodiment, after being set to the non-time-saving gaming state, the fluctuation time of the first and second special 1 fluctuations is determined to be 1 second as described above. After setting the non-time-saving game state, when the special symbol Xa is won in the first and second special 1 fluctuations, the state change suggesting effect is executed in the same manner as described above.

That is, in FIGS. 101 and 102, as an example of the case where the state change suggestion effect is executed, the case where the special 1 variation is executed during the final normal pattern variation has been described. However, after the end of the final normal figure fluctuation, if the special 1 fluctuation is executed, as described above, the result production is executed in the customer waiting state (both customers waiting state described later), and with the start of the special 1 fluctuation , The result production ends and the special figure fluctuation production is started.

At this time, in the first or second special 1 variation in the non-time-saving gaming state, when the special symbol Xa is won, the state change suggesting effect is executed in the same manner as shown in FIG. On the other hand, in the special 1 fluctuation after the third time in the non-time-saving gaming state, when the special symbol Xa is won, as shown in FIG. 90, a special fluctuation performance is executed.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the first state (non-time-saving gaming state), the second state different from the first state (small time-saving gaming state), the first state and the second state Also, any of the multiple provided states including the third state (C time-saving game state) in which the game ball is easy to enter the start region (second start port 122) provided in the game region 116 The game progresses with .

In addition, based on the entry of the game ball into the starting area, there are a plurality of types of symbols including winning symbols (big winning symbols, small winning symbols), first specific symbols (special symbols Xb) and second specific symbols (special symbols Xa). (special pattern), and based on the determination of the winning pattern, open and close the big winning hole provided in the game area 116 to control the opening and closing of the big winning hole opening and closing game (big role game, small winning game) ) is executed, the state is changed according to preset state change conditions, and an effect during the game is executed.

Further, the state can be changed to the second state based on the determination of the first specific symbol in the first state, and based on the determination of the second specific symbol in the first state, The state can be changed to the third state, and based on the determination of the first specific pattern or the second specific pattern in the second state, the state is not changed, and in the third state, a predetermined state change condition It is possible to change the state to the first state based on the establishment of (shortening of working hours).

Then, after setting to the first state, when the second specific pattern is determined during a predetermined period in which the number of times the pattern is determined is within a predetermined number of times (one time), and when the second specific pattern is determined after the predetermined period elapses. Different performances (special variation performance, state change suggestion performance) are executed when is determined.

Further, a common effect (a effect for C mode) is executed during the third state and during the predetermined period, and when the second specific pattern is determined during the predetermined period, the common effect is interrupted and specified. A production (state change suggestion production) is executed.

According to the above configuration, even in the case of shifting to the same C time-saving game state, since an effect according to the game situation is executed, it is possible to reliably inform the player of the change in the game state. , the risk of giving disadvantage to the player is reduced.

Here, in the slightly time-saving game state, even if a game ball passes through the gate 124, the second starting port 122 is not long-opened, and is always short-opened. In the short opening of the second starting port 122, since the second starting port 122 is opened only for 0.05 seconds, basically no game ball enters the second starting port 122 during the short opening. However, if an unforeseen situation such as a game ball getting caught in the second starting hole 122 occurs, the game ball may enter the second starting hole 122 during short-circuit opening.

Temporarily, when a game ball enters the second starting port 122 in a short time gaming state, a major role lottery based on special 2 reservation can be performed. When an irregular situation such as winning a jackpot occurs due to this big role lottery, the game state shifts from the short-time game state to an advantageous state. In an advantageous state, right-handed shots are required, but if the player does not notice the shift to an advantageous state, left-handed shots are continued, which may be disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, in the present embodiment, even when an irregular situation occurs in the slightly shortened gaming state, the same state change suggestion effect as described above is executed.

FIG. 103 is a diagram for explaining an example of an irregular performance in the short-time gaming state according to the embodiment. As shown in FIG. 103(a), in the slight time-saving gaming state, a special figure variation production targeting special 1 variation is executed. However, for example, if the game ball does not enter the first starting port 120 and the special 1 variation is not executed, the state shifts to a customer waiting state (both customers waiting state described later). When the Special 2 variation is executed in the customer waiting state (both customers waiting state described later), the first mini-symbol 220 is variably displayed as shown in FIG. 103(b). In the big win lottery related to the special 2 variation, the big win or the small win is always won, so in this case, as shown in FIG. be done. The state change suggesting effect executed at this time is the same effect as when another irregular situation occurs and the game state is changed.

Then, when the special symbol is stop-displayed on the second special symbol display 162, as shown in FIG. 103(c), the first mini-symbol 220 is stop-displayed, and the hitting to the right notification effect is executed. Thus, the state change suggesting effect is executed not only when the game state is changed, but also when an irregular situation occurs and a big winning game or a small winning game is executed. FIG. 103 shows an example of the effect when an irregular situation occurs in the normal state and a big win game or a small winning game is executed, but even in an advantageous state, due to the irregular situation, A big winning game or a small winning game may be executed.

FIG. 104 is a diagram for explaining an example of an effect at irregular times in an advantageous state according to the embodiment. As shown in FIG. 104(a), in an advantageous state, the normal pattern fluctuation is being executed, and the normal pattern fluctuation effect is being executed during the normal pattern fluctuation. In this state, when a game ball enters the first starting port 120, special 1 variation is executed, and a big role lottery based on special 1 reservation is performed. If a big win is won in this big role lottery, as shown in FIGS. 104(b) and 104(c), a state change suggestion effect is executed, and a shutter image 250 is displayed on the main effect display section 200a. The state change suggesting effect executed at this time is the same as the effect executed when other irregular situations occur.

This state change suggesting effect is continuously executed until the special 1 fluctuation is finished even if the general pattern fluctuation is finished. Therefore, for example, when the normal pattern variation ends during the special 1 variation, as shown in FIG. A stop display is made. Then, when the special symbol (jackpot symbol) is stop-displayed on the first special symbol display 160, as shown in FIG. be started.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the game progresses in one of a plurality of states including a predetermined state (advantageous state) in which the game progresses due to establishment of the starting condition (start of normal pattern fluctuation). Then, the progress of the game is controlled based on the state being set, and in the predetermined state, when the first irregular condition set in advance is satisfied (jackpot winning in special 1 fluctuation), and the first irregular When a second irregular condition different from the condition is satisfied (special 2 times of reduced working hours or the total number of reduced working hours reaches a specified number of times), a predetermined state is shifted to another state (big role game, non-shortened working hours game state). At this time, when the first irregular condition is satisfied in the predetermined state, and when the second irregular condition is satisfied in the predetermined state, a preset common effect (state change suggestion effect) is executed. do.

In this way, a common effect is executed when an irregular situation occurs and the game state is changed, and when an irregular situation occurs and a big role game is executed. It becomes easier for the player to notice that a change in operation or the like is being requested, thereby reducing the risk of the player being disadvantaged.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the state change suggesting effect can be executed even when the power is turned on again after the power is cut off during the game.

FIG. 105 is a diagram for explaining an example of an effect when the power is turned off and then turned on again during the time-saving game state according to the embodiment. As shown in FIG. 105(a), it is assumed that special 1 variation is being executed and special figure variation production is being performed in the slightly reduced working time gaming state. In this state, it is assumed that the power is turned off and the power is turned on again. As described above, when the power is turned on again, the subcommand group set process (see FIG. 77) is executed in the main control board 300, and various commands are sent from the main control board 300 to the sub control board 330. sent.

When a power cut occurs during the variable display or stop display of the symbols on the first special symbol display device 160 or the second special symbol display device 162, the type of the special symbol determined before the occurrence of the power failure is indicated. A special symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted to the sub-control board 330 (S110-23). At this time, when a special symbol confirmation designation command indicating a jackpot symbol is received, a state change suggestion effect is executed as shown in FIG. 105(b). In this case, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 160 or the second special symbol display device 162, as shown in FIG.

On the other hand, when a special symbol confirmation designation command indicating a lost symbol is received, as shown in FIG. 105(d), a message of "recovering from power failure, please wait for a while" is displayed on the main effect display section 200a. . In this case, when the special symbols are stop-displayed on the first special symbol display 160, as shown in FIG.

FIG. 106 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect when the power is turned off and then turned on again during the advantageous state according to the embodiment. As shown in FIG. 106(a), in an advantageous state, normal pattern fluctuation is being executed, and normal pattern fluctuation production is being executed. In this state, it is assumed that the power is turned off and the power is turned on again. As described above, when the power is turned on again, various commands are transmitted from the main control board 300 to the sub control board 330 . However, in this embodiment, when the power is turned on, a command regarding a special game is transmitted, but a command regarding a normal game is not transmitted.

Therefore, when the power is turned off and then turned on again in an advantageous state, as shown in FIG. 106(b), a message "Recovering from power cut, please wait for a while" is displayed on the main effect display section 200a. . At this time, since the sub-control board 330 cannot distinguish whether or not the normal pattern is fluctuating, the second mini-symbol 221 is stopped and displayed.

In this state, if the special 1 variation is started and the jackpot is won, the state change suggesting effect is executed as shown in FIG. 106(c). After that, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 160, as shown in FIG.

As described above, in this embodiment, the state change suggestion effect can be executed even when the power is cut off. As described above, the state change suggestion effect is executed in various situations where an irregular situation occurs and the state is changed. Therefore, when the power is turned on again after an unexpected power outage, the state change suggesting effect is executed, so that the player can easily grasp what kind of operation should be performed afterward. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will be disadvantaged.

FIG. 107 is a diagram illustrating another example of the effect when the power is turned off and then turned on again during the advantageous state according to the embodiment. As shown in FIG. 107(a), in an advantageous state, the normal pattern fluctuation is being executed, and when the normal pattern fluctuation effect is being executed, it is assumed that the power supply has been cut off. In this case, when the power is turned on again, as shown in FIG. 107(b), a message "Recovering from power failure, please wait for a while" is displayed on the main effect display section 200a.

Here, it is assumed that the long opening of the second starting port 122 has been elected in the normal pattern fluctuation started before the occurrence of the power failure. In this case, when the normal pattern fluctuation ends, the auxiliary game in which the second starting port 122 is long opened is started. At this time, along with the start of the auxiliary game, the main control board 300 to the sub-control board 330 to transmit a general electric open designation command (FIG. 87). This normal/commercial power opening specification command is configured to be able to identify whether the second starting port 122 is to be short-opened or long-opened.

When receiving the general electric open specification command indicating long opening of the second starting port 122, the sub control board 330 executes an operation instruction effect as shown in FIG. 107(c). The operation instruction effect executed at this time is the same as the effect executed when the long opening of the second starting port 122 is won in an advantageous state without turning off the power.

In addition, in this embodiment, as the customer waiting state on the sub control board 330, three customer waiting states, ie, a special customer waiting state, a normal customer waiting state, and a double customer waiting state are provided.

As described above, in the embodiment, in the special symbol variation waiting process in the main control board 300, when it is determined that the number of special 1 reserves and special 2 reserves stored is 0, the sub control board 330 is designated to wait for customers. Command is sent. The sub control board 330 sets a special customer waiting state when receiving the customer waiting designation command. When the sub-control board 330 receives the variation command while the special customer waiting state is set, the special customer waiting state is canceled.

Further, as described above, in the embodiment, in the normal symbol variation waiting process in the main control board 300, when it is determined that the number of stored normal pattern reservation is 0, the secondary control board 330 designates normal pattern customer waiting. Command is sent. When the sub-control board 330 receives a general-purpose customer waiting designation command, it sets a general-purpose customer waiting state. In addition, when the general pattern customer waiting state is set, when the sub control board 330 receives the general pattern variation pattern command, the general pattern customer waiting state is canceled.

Further, when both the special customer waiting state and the general customer waiting state are set, the sub control board 330 sets the both customer waiting state. It should be noted that, when both customers waiting state is set, when the sub-control board 330 receives either the variation command of the actual variation target or the normal figure variation pattern command of the actual variation target, the both customers waiting state is canceled be done. On the other hand, in the embodiment, when both customers waiting state is set, even if the sub-control board 330 receives a variation command that is not subject to substantial variation, or a normal figure variation pattern command that is not subject to substantial variation, both The customer waiting state is not released.

FIG. 108 is the first diagram for explaining the demonstration effect according to the embodiment. As described above, since the actual variation target in the non-time-saving gaming state and the slight time-saving gaming state is the special 1 variation, as shown in FIG. A special figure variation effect is executed. At this time, if the game is properly played, the normal pattern suspension is not stored, so the second mini-symbol 221 is stopped and displayed. Then, with the end of the special 1 variation, the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c and the first mini symbol 220 are stopped and displayed, and the state shifts to the state of waiting for both customers.

When a predetermined demonstration effect start time (for example, 60 seconds) elapses without canceling the both-customers waiting state after the both-customers waiting state is set, the main effect display section 200a is displayed as shown in FIG. 108(b). , execution of a demonstration effect in which a dedicated demonstration movie is reproduced is started.

As described above, in the embodiment, when the two-customer waiting state is set, when the sub-control board 330 receives either the variation command for the real variation or the normal figure variation pattern command for the real variation , the state of waiting for both customers is canceled. On the other hand, when both customers waiting state is set, even if the sub-control board 330 receives a variation command that is not subject to substantial variation or a normal pattern variation command that is not subject to substantial variation, both customers waiting state is not released.

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. When the variable pattern command is received, as shown in FIG. 108(c), the variable display of the second mini-symbol 221 is started, but the state of waiting for both customers is not canceled and the reproduction of the demo movie is continued. be.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 108(b), when the actual variation target is the special 1 variation, the state of waiting for both customers is set, and the demo movie is played, the variation pattern command is issued. When it is received, as shown in FIG. 108(d), the state of waiting for both customers is canceled, the reproduction of the demo movie is terminated, and the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c and the first mini-symbol 220 are displayed. Variable display is started.

FIG. 109 is a second diagram illustrating the demonstration effect according to the embodiment. As described above, in the A reduced working hours gaming state, B reduced working hours gaming state, and C reduced working hours gaming state, since the real fluctuation target is the normal pattern fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 109 (a), the normal pattern fluctuation is targeted Normal figure fluctuation production is executed. At this time, if the special figure variation is not performed, the first mini-symbol 220 is stopped and displayed. Then, with the end of the normal pattern variation, the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c and the second mini symbol 221 are stopped and displayed, and the state shifts to the state of waiting for both customers.

Then, when a predetermined demonstration effect start time (for example, 60 seconds) elapses without canceling the both-customers waiting state after the both-customers waiting state is set, the main effect is displayed as shown in FIG. 109(b). In the section 200a, execution of a demonstration effect in which a dedicated demonstration movie is reproduced is started.

Also, as shown in FIG. 109(b), when the actual variation target is the normal figure variation, the state of waiting for both customers is set, and the demo movie is played, the variation command is received. In this case, as shown in FIG. 109(c), the variable display of the first mini-symbol 220 is started, but the state of waiting for both customers is not released, and the reproduction of the demo movie is continued.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 109(b), when the actual fluctuation target is the normal pattern fluctuation, the state of waiting for both customers is set, and the demo movie is played, the normal pattern fluctuation pattern When the command is received, as shown in FIG. 109(d), the state of waiting for both customers is canceled, the reproduction of the demo movie is terminated, and the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c and the second mini symbol are displayed. 221 variable display is started.

As described above, in the embodiment, even if a variation command that is not subject to substantial variation or a normal pattern variation command that is not subject to substantial variation is received, the variation display of the production symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c is not started. Therefore, if a variation command that is not subject to real variation or a normal pattern variation command that is not subject to real variation is received during playback of the demo movie and the playback of the demo movie is ended, the playback of the demo movie will end. Since the variable display of the effect symbols 210a, 210b, and 210c is not started even though the player has done so, the player may feel uncomfortable.

Therefore, in the embodiment, as described above, even if a variation command that is not subject to substantial variation or a normal pattern variation command that is not subject to substantial variation is received during playback of the demo movie, playback of the demonstration movie is terminated. First, the variable display of the first mini-symbol 220 or the second mini-symbol 221 is performed in parallel with the demo movie. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility that the player will feel discomfort. In addition, in order to end the reproduction of the demo movie, it is necessary to perform an appropriate shot (right shot or left shot) according to the game state, so it is possible to encourage the player to perform an appropriate shot.

Next, processing in the sub-control board 330 for executing each effect described above will be described. Here, the processing for executing the effect according to the present embodiment will be mainly described, and the description of other processing will be omitted.

FIG. 110 is a flowchart illustrating sub timer interrupt processing in the sub control board 330 according to the embodiment. The sub-timer interrupt process according to the embodiment is executed instead of the sub-timer interrupt process according to the reference example.

(Step S1100-1)
The sub CPU 330a saves the register.

(Step S1100-3)
The sub CPU 330a performs processing for permitting interrupts.

(Step S1100-5)
The sub CPU 330 a updates various timer counters used in the sub control board 330 . Here, the various timer counters are decremented by 1 each time the sub-timer interrupt processing of the sub-control board 330 is executed, and the decrementation is stopped when it reaches 0, unless otherwise specified.

(Step S1300)
The sub CPU 330a analyzes the command stored in the receive buffer of the sub RAM 330c and stores information corresponding to the received command.

(Step S1400)
The sub CPU 330a performs the effect control process for executing various effects based on the information stored in step S1300, that is, the command received from the main control board 300. This effect control processing will be described later.

(Step S1100-9)
The sub CPU 330a restores the register and terminates the sub timer interrupt process.

FIG. 111 is a flow chart for explaining effect control processing in the sub-control board 330 according to the embodiment.

(Step S1410)
The sub CPU 330a performs the setting of the production mode and the production mode control process for executing the production corresponding to the production mode being set. This effect mode control processing will be described later.

(Step S1420)
The sub CPU 330a performs result effect control processing for executing the result effect. This result effect control processing will be described later.

(Step S1430)
The sub CPU 330a performs a state change suggestion effect control process for executing a state change suggestion effect. This state change suggestion effect control processing will be described later.

(Step S1440)
The sub CPU 330a performs a variable effect control process for executing a variable effect. This variation effect control processing will be described later.

(Step S1450)
The sub CPU 330a has a special customer waiting flag indicating whether or not a special customer waiting state is set, a normal customer waiting flag indicating whether or not a normal customer waiting state is set, and a double customer waiting state indicating whether or not a double customer waiting state is set. A customer waiting state setting process for setting a flag is executed. This customer waiting state setting process will be described later. In the embodiment, when the special guest waiting flag is on, the special guest waiting state is set, and when the special guest waiting flag is off, the special guest waiting state is cancelled. Also, when the normal customer waiting flag is on, the normal customer waiting state is set, and when the normal customer waiting flag is off, the normal customer waiting state is cancelled. When the both-customers waiting flag is ON, the both-customers waiting state is set, and when the both-customers waiting flag is OFF, the both-customers waiting state is canceled.

(Step S1460)
The sub CPU 330a performs a demonstration effect control process for executing a demonstration effect. This demonstration effect control processing will be described later.

FIG. 112 is a flow chart explaining the effect mode control process in the sub control board 330 according to the embodiment.

(Step S1410-1)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether or not the condition for changing the effect mode is satisfied based on the information stored in the command analysis process in step S1300. If it is determined that the condition for changing the effect mode is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S1410-3, and if it is determined that the condition for changing the effect mode is not satisfied, the effect mode control process is terminated.

In addition, as a condition for changing the effect mode, for example, it is set that a predetermined game state change designation command is received, that is, the game state is changed to a predetermined game state. Further, for example, after changing to a predetermined game state, the start of special 1 variation or normal pattern variation is set as a condition for changing the production mode.

(Step S1410-3)
The sub CPU 330a confirms the current gaming state.

(Step S1410-5)
The sub CPU 330a sets an effect mode corresponding to the gaming state confirmed in step S1410-3.

(Step S1410-7)
The sub CPU 330a starts the display of the background image and the reproduction of the BGM corresponding to the effect mode set in step S1410-5, and ends the effect mode control process.

FIG. 113 is a flow chart for explaining the result effect control process in the sub control board 330 according to the embodiment.

(Step S1420-1)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether it is the end of the final normal pattern fluctuation. As a result, when it is determined that it is the end of the final normal pattern fluctuation, the process is moved to step S1420-3, and when it is determined that it is not the end of the final normal pattern fluctuation, the process is transferred to step S1420-9. .

(Step S1420-3)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether or not the short opening of the second starting port 122 has been won in the final normal pattern variation. As a result, when it is determined that the short opening of the second starting port 122 has been won, the process is shifted to step S1420-5, and it is determined that the short opening of the second starting port 122 has not been won (long opening has been won). If so, the process moves to step S1420-9.

(Step S1420-5)
The sub CPU 330a acquires the game result during the continuous game.

(Step S1420-7)
The sub CPU 330a executes the result effect based on the game result obtained in step S1420-5, and ends the result effect control process.

(Step S1420-9)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether it is in an advantageous state. As a result, if it is determined that it is in an advantageous state, the process moves to step S1420-11, and if it is determined that it is not in an advantageous state, the process moves to step S1420-15.

(Step S1420-11)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether it is the end of the special 1 variation. As a result, if it is determined that it is time to end the special 1 variation, the process proceeds to step S1420-13, and if it is determined that it is not the time to end the special 1 variation, the process proceeds to step S1420-15.

(Step S1420-13)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether the time saving end condition is satisfied. Here, it is determined that the time saving end condition is established when the total number of times of time saving reaches 10 times due to the end of the special 1 fluctuation in the advantageous state and the state is shifted from the advantageous state to the normal state. If it is determined that the time saving end condition is satisfied, the process moves to step S1420-5, and if it is determined that the time saving end condition is not satisfied, the process moves to step S1420-15.

As a result, when the total number of times of time saving reaches the prescribed number of times during the advantageous state and the game state shifts to the non-time saving game state, the result performance is executed.

(Step S1420-15)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether or not the effect end condition for the result effect is satisfied. Here, the fact that 30 seconds have passed since the start of the result presentation and the fact that the Special 1 variation has started during the result presentation are preset as conditions for ending the presentation of the result presentation. When it is determined that the effect end condition of the result effect is satisfied, the process is shifted to step S1420-17, and when it is determined that the effect end condition of the result effect is not satisfied, the result effect control process is terminated.

(Step S1420-17)
The sub CPU 330a executes a result effect end process for ending the result effect, and ends the result effect control process.

FIG. 114 is a flowchart for explaining state change suggestion effect control processing in the sub control board 330 according to the embodiment.

(Step S1430-1)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether it is currently in an advantageous state. As a result, when it is determined that it is in an advantageous state, the process proceeds to step S1430-3, and when it is determined that it is not in an advantageous state, the process proceeds to step S1430-9.

(Step S1430-3)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether it is time to start the special 1 variation. As a result, when it is determined that it is time to start the special 1 variation, the process proceeds to step S1430-5, and when it is determined that it is not the time to start the special 1 variation, the process proceeds to step S1430-17.

(Step S1430-5)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether or not the jackpot has been won. As a result, when it is determined that the jackpot has been won, the process moves to step S1430-27, and when it is determined that the jackpot has not been won, the process moves to step S1430-7.

(Step S1430-7)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether the time saving end condition is satisfied. Here, it is determined that the time saving end condition is satisfied when the total number of time saving times reaches 10 times due to the special 1 fluctuation in the advantageous state and the advantageous state transitions to the normal state. If it is determined that the time saving end condition is satisfied, the process moves to step S1430-27, and if it is determined that the time saving end condition is not satisfied, the process moves to step S1430-17.

(Step S1430-9)
If the current gaming state is the normal state (NO in step S1430-1), the sub CPU 330a determines whether it is time to start special 1 variation. As a result, when it is determined that it is time to start the special 1 variation, the process proceeds to step S1430-11, and when it is determined that it is not the time to start the special 1 variation, the process proceeds to step S1430-15.

(Step S1430-11)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether or not the special symbol Xa is won. As a result, when it is determined that the special symbol Xa is won, the process is moved to step S1430-13, and when it is determined that the special symbol Xa is not won, the process is moved to step S1430-17.

(Step S1430-13)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether or not the special 1 variation is executed within the second time in the non-time-saving gaming state. As a result, if it is determined that it is a special 1 variation within the second time in the non-time-saving gaming state, the process is moved to step S1430-27, and if it is determined that it is not a special 1 variation within the second time in the non-time-saving gaming state to step S1430-17.

(Step S1430-15)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether it is time to start the special 2 variation in the normal state. As a result, when it is determined that it is time to start the special 2 variation, the process proceeds to step S1430-27, and when it is determined that it is not the time to start the special 2 variation, the process proceeds to step S1430-17.

(Step S1430-17)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether or not it has received a special symbol confirmation designation command when the power is turned on. As a result, when it is determined that the special symbol confirmation designation command is received, the process is moved to step S1430-19, and when it is determined that the special symbol confirmation designation command is not received, the process is moved to step S1430-21. .

(Step S1430-19)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether it has received a special symbol confirmation designation command indicating a big win or a small win. As a result, when it is determined that a special symbol confirmation designation command indicating a big hit or a small hit has been received, the processing is shifted to step S1430-27, and it is determined that a special symbol confirmation designation command indicating a big hit or a small hit has not been received. If so, the process moves to step S1430-21.

(Step S1430-21)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether a variation command has been received. As a result, when it is determined that the variation command has been received, the process proceeds to step S1430-23, and when it is determined that the variation command has not been received, the state change suggestion effect control process is terminated.

(Step S1430-23)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether the received variation command is a variation command for a big win or a small win. As a result, when it is determined that the variation command for the big hit or the small hit is received, the process is moved to step S1430-25, and when it is determined that the variation command for the big hit or the small hit is not received, the The state change suggestion effect control process is terminated.

(Step S1430-25)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether recovery from power failure is in progress. As a result, when it is determined that the power is being restored, the process proceeds to step S1430-27, and when it is determined that the power is not being restored, the state change suggestion effect control process is ended.

(Step S1430-27)
The sub CPU 330a executes the state change suggestion effect and terminates the state change suggestion effect control process.

According to the above-described state change suggestion effect control processing, when the jackpot is won in the special 1 variation in the advantageous state, and when the special 1 variation reaches the total time reduction number in the advantageous state, the first special symbol display 160 , that is, during the variable display of the symbols on the first special symbol display device 160, the state change suggesting effect is executed.

Also, after shifting to the non-time-saving gaming state, when the special symbol Xa is elected in the first or second special 1 variation and the state is shifted to the C time-saving gaming state, the variation display of the symbol on the first special symbol display 160 Along with the start, a state change suggestion effect is executed.

Further, when the special 2 variation is started in the normal state, the state change suggesting effect is executed along with the start of the symbol variation display on the second special symbol display device 162 .

In addition, when a power failure occurs during the variable display of symbols when a big win or a small win is won and the power is turned on again, the state change suggesting performance is executed with the power on again.

In addition, when the big win lottery is performed during the recovery from the power failure, and a big win or a small win is won, the state is changed with the start of the fluctuation display of the symbols on the first special symbol display device 160 or the second special symbol display device 162. Suggestion production is executed.

FIG. 115 is a flow chart for explaining the variation effect control process in the sub-control board 330 according to the embodiment.

(Step S1440-1)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether a variation command has been received. As a result, when it is determined that the variation command has been received, the process proceeds to step S1440-3, and when it is determined that the variation command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S1440-11.

(Step S1440-3)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether the condition for executing the special figure variation effect is established. In addition, the execution condition of the special figure fluctuation production is a condition that makes it possible to execute the fluctuation production based on the received fluctuation command with the start of the special 1 fluctuation. For example, when the game state is normal state, receiving a variation command related to special 1 variation, and winning a jackpot in a non-time-saving gaming state, it is a special 1 variation after the third time in a non-time-saving gaming state Things and the like are set as execution conditions of the special figure fluctuation production.

(Step S1440-5)
The sub CPU 330a determines and stores the execution pattern of the special figure variation effect based on the received variation command.

(Step S1440-7)
The sub CPU 330a performs a special figure variation effect execution process for executing a special figure variation effect with the execution pattern stored in step S1440-5. As a result, a variable effect is executed.

(Step S1441)
The sub CPU 330a executes both-customers waiting state release processing for releasing the both-customers waiting state. This two-customer waiting state canceling process will be described later in detail.

(Step S1442)
The sub CPU 330a executes a special customer waiting state cancellation process for canceling the special customer waiting state. This special customer waiting state canceling process will be described later in detail.

(Step S1440-9)
The sub CPU 330 a executes the variable display of the first mini-symbol 220 .

(Step S1440-11)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether it has received a general pattern variation pattern command. As a result, when it is determined that the normal pattern fluctuation pattern command is received, the process is moved to step S1440-13, and when it is determined that the normal pattern fluctuation pattern command is not received, the fluctuation production control process is terminated. do.

(Step S1440-13)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether or not conditions for executing the normal pattern variation effect are established. In addition, the execution condition of the normal pattern fluctuation effect is a condition that allows execution of the variable effect based on the received normal pattern fluctuation pattern command with the start of the normal pattern fluctuation. As execution conditions of normal figure fluctuation production, for example, game state being advantageous state and the like are mentioned.

(Step S1440-15)
The sub CPU 330a determines and stores the execution pattern of the normal pattern variation effect based on the received normal pattern variation pattern command.

(Step S1440-17)
The sub CPU 330a performs a normal pattern variation effect execution process for executing a normal pattern variation effect in the execution pattern stored in step S1440-15. As a result, a variable effect is executed.

(Step S1441)
The sub CPU 330a executes both-customers waiting state release processing for releasing the both-customers waiting state. This two-customer waiting state canceling process will be described later in detail.

(Step S1443)
The sub CPU 330a executes a general-purpose customer waiting state cancellation process for canceling the general-purpose customer waiting state. This general-purpose customer waiting state release processing will be described later in detail.

(Step S1440-19)
The sub CPU 330a executes the variable display of the second mini-symbol 222 and terminates the variable effect control process.

FIG. 116 is a flow chart for explaining the both-customers waiting state canceling process in the sub-control board 330 according to the embodiment.

(Step S1441-1)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether it has received either a variation command for a substantial variation or a normal pattern variation command for a substantial variation. As a result, if any of the real fluctuation target variation command or the normal figure fluctuation pattern command of the real variation target is received, the process is moved to step S1441-3, the real variation target variation command, or the real When none of the normal pattern fluctuation pattern command to be changed is received, the both customers waiting state canceling process is terminated.

(Step S1441-3)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether the flag for waiting for both customers is ON. As a result, when the both-customers-waiting flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S1441-5, and when the both-customers-waiting flag is OFF, the both-customers-waiting state release process is terminated.

(Step S1441-5)
The sub CPU 330a turns off the flag for waiting for both customers.

(Step S1441-7)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether or not the demonstration effect is being executed in the main effect display section 200a. As a result, when the demonstration effect is being executed, the process moves to step S1441-9, and when the demonstration effect is not being executed, the both customers waiting state release process is terminated.

(Step S1441-9)
The sub CPU 330a ends the execution of the demonstration effect in the main effect display section 200a, and ends the both-customers waiting state canceling process.

FIG. 117 is a flow chart for explaining special customer waiting state release processing in the sub control board 330 according to the embodiment.

(Step S1442-1)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether the special customer waiting flag is ON. As a result, when the special guest waiting flag is ON, the process is moved to step S1442-3, and when the special guest waiting flag is OFF, the special guest waiting state release processing is terminated.

(Step S1442-3)
The sub CPU 330a turns off the special customer waiting flag and terminates the special customer waiting state canceling process.

FIG. 118 is a flow chart for explaining the general-purpose customer waiting state canceling process in the sub-control board 330 according to the embodiment.

(Step S1443-1)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether the general-purpose customer waiting flag is on. As a result, when the general pattern customer waiting flag is on, the process is moved to step S1443-3, and when the general pattern customer waiting flag is off, the normal pattern customer waiting state canceling process is terminated.

(Step S1443-3)
The sub CPU 330a turns off the general-purpose customer waiting flag, and terminates the general-purpose customer waiting state release processing.

FIG. 119 is a flowchart for explaining customer waiting state setting processing in the sub control board 330 according to the embodiment.

(Step S1450-1)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether or not a customer waiting designation command has been received. As a result, when the customer waiting designation command is received, the processing is shifted to step S1450-3, and when the customer waiting designation command is not received, the processing is shifted to step S1450-7. The customer waiting designation command is set in the special symbol variation waiting process in the main control board 300, and then transmitted to the sub-control board 330 by the subcommand transmission process.

(Step S1450-3)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether the special customer waiting flag is off. As a result, when the special customer waiting flag is off, the process is moved to step S1450-5, and when the special customer waiting flag is on, the process is moved to step S1450-7.

(Step S1450-5)
The sub CPU 330a turns on the special customer waiting flag.

(Step S1450-7)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether or not it has received a general-purpose customer waiting designation command. As a result, when the general pattern customer waiting designation command is received, the processing is shifted to step S1450-9, and when the general pattern customer waiting designation command is not received, the processing is shifted to step S1450-13. In addition, after the general pattern customer waiting designation command is set in the normal symbol variation waiting process in the main control board 300, it is transmitted to the sub control board 330 by the subcommand transmission process.

(Step S1450-9)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether the general-purpose customer waiting flag is off. As a result, when the general pattern customer waiting flag is off, the process moves to step S1450-11, and when the general pattern customer waiting flag is on, the process moves to step S1450-13.

(Step S1450-11)
The sub CPU 330a turns on the general-purpose customer waiting flag.

(Step S1450-13)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether the special customer waiting flag is on. As a result, when the special customer waiting flag is ON, the process is moved to step S1450-15, and when the special customer waiting flag is OFF, the customer waiting state setting process is terminated.

(Step S1450-15)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether the general-purpose customer waiting flag is on. As a result, when the general pattern customer waiting flag is on, the process is moved to step S1450-17, and when the general pattern customer waiting flag is off, the customer waiting state setting process is terminated.

(Step S1450-17)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether the flag for waiting for both customers is off. As a result, when the both-customers-waiting flag is off, the process proceeds to step S1450-19, and when the both-customers-waiting flag is on, the customer-waiting state setting process is terminated.

(Step S1450-19)
The sub CPU 330a turns on the flag for waiting for both customers.

(Step S1450-21)
The sub CPU 330a sets a predetermined timer value (for example, 60 seconds) to the demonstration effect start timer.

FIG. 120 is a flow chart for explaining demonstration effect control processing in the sub control board 330 according to the embodiment.

(Step S1460-1)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether the flag for waiting for both customers is ON. As a result, when the both-customers waiting flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S1460-3, and when the both-customers waiting flag is OFF, the demonstration effect control process is ended.

(Step S1460-3)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether the timer value of the demonstration effect start timer is greater than zero. As a result, when it is determined that the timer value is greater than 0, the process proceeds to step S1460-5, and when it is determined that the timer value is not greater than 0, the demonstration effect control process is terminated.

(Step S1460-5)
The sub CPU 330a decrements the timer value of the demonstration effect start timer.

(Step S1460-7)
Sub CPU 330a determines whether the timer value of the demonstration effect start timer updated in step S1460-5 is zero. As a result, when it is determined that the timer value is 0, the process proceeds to step S1460-9, and when it is determined that the timer value is not 0, the demonstration effect control process is terminated.

(Step S1460-9)
The sub CPU 330a performs a process for starting reproduction of a dedicated demo movie on the main effect display section 200a, and ends the demonstration effect control process.

While the preferred embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the accompanying drawings, it goes without saying that the present invention is not limited to such embodiments. It is obvious that a person skilled in the art can conceive of various modifications or modifications within the scope of the claims, and it should be understood that these also belong to the technical scope of the present invention. be done.

In the above embodiment, the big win and the small win are provided, but it is sufficient that either the big win or the small win is provided. Applicable to first and second class mixers.

Moreover, the presentation in the above embodiment is merely an example, and needless to say, the design can be changed as appropriate.

In the above embodiment, a case where six levels of setting values are provided has been described, but setting values may not be provided, and the number of setting values is not particularly limited. Also, in the above embodiment, the odds of winning the jackpot are different depending on the set value. However, what differs depending on the set value is not limited to this.

In the above embodiment, the case where the first game area 116a and the second game area 116b are provided on the game board 108 as areas in which game balls can be separately hit has been described. However, the board configuration of the game board 108 is not limited to this, and only one game area may be provided.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the number of normal pattern fluctuations is set as the time saving end condition, but instead of the normal pattern fluctuation frequency or in addition to the normal pattern fluctuation frequency 122) and the number of times of operation, and the number of winning times in the general drawing lottery may be set.

Also, in the above embodiment, the result of the major role lottery based on the special 2 reserve cannot be a loss, but the major role lottery based on the special 2 reserve may also result in a loss with a predetermined probability.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a case has been described in which a plurality of game states with different game progress conditions relating to the normal game are provided, but the content of the game state is not particularly limited. In any case, the present invention is widely applicable to gaming machines in which a game progresses in one of a plurality of states including a predetermined state in which the game progresses when a starting condition is established.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, in the advantageous state, when the jackpot is won in the special 1 variation, the state moves from the advantageous state to the execution state of the big role game, and when the total number of time reductions reaches the specified number of times due to the special 1 variation, the advantageous state is non- The case of shifting to the time-saving gaming state has been described. However, in the above-described embodiment, the condition for ending the advantageous state is only an example, and the design can be changed as appropriate. Also, the state to be shifted when the condition for ending the advantageous state is established can be appropriately changed in design.

Incidentally, the main control board 300 in the above embodiment corresponds to the game control means of the present invention.
Further, in the above embodiment, the main CPU 300a that executes the processes of steps S631, S632 and S671 corresponds to the state changing means of the present invention.
Also, in the above embodiment, the sub CPU 330a that executes the process of step S1430 corresponds to the effect executing means of the present invention.

100 game machine 300 main control board 300a main CPU
300b Main ROM
300c Main RAM
330 sub-control board 330a sub-CPU
330b sub ROM
330c sub-RAM

Claims (1)

A gaming machine in which a game progresses in one of a plurality of states including a predetermined state in which the game progresses due to establishment of a starting condition,
game control means for controlling the progress of the game based on the state being set;
In the predetermined state, when a preset first irregular condition is satisfied, and when a second irregular condition different from the first irregular condition is satisfied, the predetermined state is changed to another state. a state changing means for shifting to
effect execution means for executing a preset common effect both when the first irregular condition is satisfied in the predetermined state and when the second irregular condition is satisfied in the predetermined state; ,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

Images